€¦ · iii Contents About This Guide Introduction ...

PPT 2800 Series with Windows® Mobile2003 Software for Pocket PCs

Product Reference Guide

PPT 2800 Series with Windows® Mobile 2003 Softwarefor Pocket PCs


72E-67136-02Revision A

February 2005

ii

© 2001-2005 by Symbol Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means, without permission in writing from Symbol. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems. The material in this manual is subject to change without notice.

The software is provided strictly on an “as is” basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is on a licensed basis. Symbol grants to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program). Except as noted below, such license may not be assigned, sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Symbol. No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under copyright law. The user shall not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material, create a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Symbol. The user agrees to maintain Symbol’s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in whole or in part. The user agrees not to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof.

Symbol reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or design.

Symbol does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of any product, circuit, or application described herein.

No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Symbol Technologies, Inc., intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits, and subsystems contained in Symbol products.

Symbol, Spectrum One, and Spectrum24 are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies, Inc. Other product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.

Symbol Technologies, Inc.One Symbol PlazaHoltsville, New York 11742-1300http://www.symbol.com

Contents

About This GuideIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiiiChapter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiiiNotational Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xivRelated Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvService Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Symbol Support Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

Chapter 1. Getting StartedChapter Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Unpacking the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Parts of the PPT 2800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Installing the SIM Card (PPT 2837 Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Using a Headset (PPT 2837 Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Installing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Using the Cradle to Charge the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Charging Spare Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Using the Synchronization Cable to Charge the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Checking Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Attaching the Handstrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Attaching the Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Starting the PPT 2800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Aligning the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Setting Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Setting Up the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

iii

PPT 2800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide

Chapter 2. Operating the PPT 2800Chapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Using the Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Controlling the Contrast/Backlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3PPT 2800 Application Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Using the Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Using the Navigation Bar and Command Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Status Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Speaker Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Battery Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Connectivity Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Time Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Instant Message Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12E-Mail Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Multiple Notification Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Selecting Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Using Pop-up Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Notifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Entering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Entering Information Using the Input Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Selecting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Writing on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Drawing on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Recording a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Entering Data via the Bar Code Scanner (Scan Wedge). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Using My Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Scanning PDF417 Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Resetting the PPT 2800 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Performing a Warm Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Performing a Cold Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

iv

Contents

Chapter 3. Customizing the PPT 2800Chapter Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Adjusting Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Adding Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Adding a Program from the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Adding a Program to the Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Adjusting Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Personal Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6System Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Connections Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Assigning User-Written Applications to Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Up/Down Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Input Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Word Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16New Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Owner Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Hint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Sounds & Notifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Today. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Copyrights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Certificates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

v


Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41Running Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43Optimizing Battery Life. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Regional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45Remove Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Wakeups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51System and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Chapter 4. CommunicationsChapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Installing ActiveSync Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Setting up a Partnership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Performing an ActiveSync for the First Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Performing ActiveSync using the Synchronization Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Performing ActiveSync using the Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Performing Subsequent ActiveSync Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Performing a Remote ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Serial Communication Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Setting Up a Connection on the PPT 2800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Setting Up a Connection on the Desktop Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Installing eConnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

vi

Contents

Chapter 5. AirBEAM SmartChapter Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3AirBEAM Package Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3AirBEAM Smart Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

AirBEAM License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Synchronizing with the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

AirBEAM Staging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Chapter 6. ApplicationsChapter Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Creating Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Using the Summary Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Creating Meeting Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Using the Summary Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Using the Summary Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Synchronizing E-mail Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Using the Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16Creating E-mail Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Managing E-mail Messages and Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

Chapter 7. Companion ProgramsChapter Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Pocket Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Typing Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Writing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Recording Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Pocket Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Tips for Working in Pocket Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

MSN® Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Setting Up an Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

vii


Working with Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Chatting with Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Windows Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Chapter 8. Pocket Internet ExplorerChapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Mobile Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Favorite Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Creating Mobile Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Saving Memory on the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Using AvantGo Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Using Pocket Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Browsing the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Copy Pictures to the Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Edit Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Send Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Set Picture as Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9View Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9View Slideshow of Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Chapter 9. ConnectionsChapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Transferring Items Using Infrared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Connecting to an ISP or a Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Setting Up an E-mail Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Getting Help Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Chapter 10. Spectrum24 Network ConfigurationChapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Mobile Companion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Finding WLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Changing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Configuring the Radio Using a Registration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

viii

Contents

Chapter 11. Wireless Wide Area Network ConfigurationChapter Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3Establishing a GPRS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

GPRS Parameters Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3Configuring a GPRS WAN Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16Connecting via GPRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19

Establishing a GSM CSD Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21Installing the GSM Demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21Verifying the Functionality of the SIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21Configuring a GSM WAN Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24Connecting via GSM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27

Chapter 12. Software Installation on Development PCChapter Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Required System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3SMDK for eVC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4SMDK for eVC4 Contents and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

SMDK for .NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6SMDK for .NET Contents and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

DCP for PPT 2800w. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7DCP for PPT 2800w Contents and Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

Installing Other Development Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

Chapter 13. Configuring the TerminalChapter Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3Starting Terminal Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Defining Script Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7Creating the Script for the Hex Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Opening a New or Existing Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9Updating TCM 1.X Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9Copying Components to the Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9Saving the Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Building the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10Sending the Hex Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Saving the Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

ix


Setting Up IPL to Receive the File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12IPL Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16TCM Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18Creating a Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Creating a Splash Screen on Color Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20Creating a Splash Screen on Monochrome Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Flash Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21FFS Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21Working with FFS Partitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21Non-FFS Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23Downloading Partitions to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24

IPL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24Partition Update vs. File Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24Upgrade Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25

Chapter 14. Maintenance and TroubleshootingChapter Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Safely Maintaining the PPT 2800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Terminal and Cradle Connector Cleaning Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

Required Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Cleaning the Terminal Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Cleaning the Cradle Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10

Appendix A. Block Recognizer Characters

Appendix B. Demo ProgramIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1Scan Demo (VC Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3

Scanning Data Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3Scanning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4

HTML Scan Demo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5Wedge On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5ScanBrowse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-6

Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7MagStripe Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-8Sounds (Audio Sample) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-9Images (ImageViewer Sample). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-10CE Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-11About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-12Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-12

x

Contents

Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

Appendix C. GSM Demo ProgramIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1GSM Demo Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1GSM Demo Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2Dial # Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3Send SMS Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4Read SMS Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

GSM Demo Menu Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13

Appendix D. Technical SpecificationsEnvironment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1COM Port Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3Pin-Outs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4

xi


xii

About This Guide

IntroductionThe PPT 2800 Series with Windows® Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide provides information about the PPT 2800 Series terminal using the Windows Mobile 2003 operating system, and its accessories. The PPT 2800 Series includes the following models:

• PPT 2800: Batch• PPT 2837: Wireless WAN radio (GSM/GPRS)• PPT 284x: Spectrum24 LAN radio.

Chapter DescriptionsTopics covered in this guide are as follows:

• Chapter 1, Getting Started explains the physical buttons and controls on the PPT 2800 terminal, how to install and charge the batteries, start the PPT 2800 terminal for the first time, and attach the handstrap and wriststrap.

• Chapter 2, Operating the PPT 2800 explains how to use the terminal, including instructions for powering on and resetting the terminal, entering information, scanning, and using the stylus.

• Chapter 3, Customizing the PPT 2800 explains how to adjust settings on the terminal, and add and delete programs.

• Chapter 4, Communications explains how to use Microsoft® ActiveSync™ for communications between the terminal and desktop computer.

xiii


• Chapter 5, AirBEAM Smart explains how to use the AirBEAM Smart product which allows specially designed software packages to be transferred between a host server and Symbol wireless handheld terminals.

• Chapter 6, Applications describes how to use the Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Notes and Inbox applications.

• Chapter 7, Companion Programs describes how to use Pocket Word, Pocket Excel, and MSN® Messenger.

• Chapter 8, Pocket Internet Explorer explains how to set up favorite links and channels, and browse the web on the terminal.

• Chapter 9, Connections describes how to connect the terminal to a network and e-mail server, and transfer information via infrared.

• Chapter 10, Spectrum24 Network Configuration describes how to configure the Spectrum24 wireless connection.

• Chapter 11, Wireless Wide Area Network Configuration describes how to configure the terminal for GSM/GPRS connection.

• Chapter 12, Software Installation on Development PC provides information on the Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK), used to develop applications for the terminal.

• Chapter 13, Configuring the Terminal describes how to install and use the Terminal Configuration Manager (TCM) and Initial Program Loader (IPL).

• Chapter 14, Maintenance and Troubleshooting provides information to help care for the PPT 2800 terminal and solve problems.

• Appendix A, Block Recognizer Characters details how to write letters on the terminal using the Block Recognizer so they are correctly translated into text.

• Appendix B, Demo Program provides an overview of the PPT 2800 demo program applications, such as scanning, setup, diagnostic utilities, and file management.

• Appendix C, GSM Demo Program describes how to use the GSM Demo program and explore what features GSM and the PPT 2837 terminal offer.

• Appendix D, Technical Specifications includes a table listing the technical specifications for the terminal.

Notational ConventionsThis document uses these conventions:

• “terminal” or “PPT 2800” refers to any model of PPT 2800. • “User” refers to anyone the PPT 2800.

xiv

About This Guide

• “You” refers to any person using this manual as a reference to install, configure, operate, maintain and troubleshoot the PPT 2800.

• Italics are used to highlight specific items in the general text, and to identify chapters and sections in this and related documents. It also identifies names of screens, menus, menu items, and fields within screens.

• Courier text identifies buttons to be tapped or clicked on screens.• Bullets (•) indicate:

• lists of alternatives or action items.• lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential.

• Numbered lists indicate a set of sequential steps, i.e., those that describe step-by-step procedures.

Related DocumentsThe following documents provide more information on the PPT 2800 terminal.

• PPT 2800 Quick Reference Guide, p/n 72-54893-xx• CRD 2700-1000S Cradle Quick Reference Guide, p/n 70-38707-xx• CRD 2700-4000E 4-Slot Ethernet Cradle Quick Reference Guide, p/n 72-50357-xx• CHX700-4000C 4-Slot Charging Cradle Quick Reference Guide, p/n 72-50367-xx• MDM 3000 Series Modem Module Quick Reference Guide, p/n 72-42908-xx• VCA 3000 Charging Adapter Quick Reference Guide, p/n 72-51938-xx• TRG 3000 Trigger Handle Quick Reference Guide, p/n 72-51422-xx• Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for eVC4, available at

http://devzone.symbol.com• Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for .NET, available at

http://devzone.symbol.com• Device Configuration Package (DCP) for the PPT 2800w, available at

http://devzone.symbol.com.

Service InformationContact the Symbol Support Center for any problems with the PPT 2800 equipment. If the problem cannot be resolved over the phone, the equipment may need to be returned for servicing. If that is necessary, special directions will be provided.

xv


Note: Symbol Technologies is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty.

Symbol Support CenterFor service information, warranty information or technical assistance contact or call the Symbol Support Center in:

United StatesSymbol Technologies, Inc.One Symbol PlazaHoltsville, New York 11742-13001-800-653-5350

CanadaSymbol Technologies Canada, Inc.5180 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, Canada L4W 5L91-866-416-8545 (Inside Canada)905-629-7226 (Outside Canada)

United KingdomSymbol TechnologiesSymbol PlaceWinnersh Triangle, Berkshire RG41 5TPUnited Kingdom0800 328 2424 (Inside UK)+44 118 945 7529 (Outside UK)

Asia/PacificSymbol Technologies Asia, Inc.230 Victoria Street #04-05Bugis Junction Office TowerSingapore 188024337-6588 (Inside Singapore)+65-337-6588 (Outside Singapore)

AustraliaSymbol Technologies Pty. Ltd.432 St. Kilda RoadMelbourne, Victoria 30041-800-672-906 (Inside Australia)+61-3-9866-6044 (Outside Australia)

Austria/ÖsterreichSymbol Technologies Austria GmbH Prinz-Eugen Strasse 70 / 2.Haus1040 Vienna, Austria01-5055794-0 (Inside Austria)+43-1-5055794-0 (Outside Austria)

Denmark/DanmarkSymbol Technologies ASDr. Neergaardsvej 32970 Hørsholm7020-1718 (Inside Denmark)+45-7020-1718 (Outside Denmark)

Europe/Mid-East Distributor OperationsContact your local distributor or call+44 118 945 7360

xvi

About This Guide

Finland/SuomiOy Symbol TechnologiesKaupintie 8 A 6FIN-00440 Helsinki, Finland9 5407 580 (Inside Finland)+358 9 5407 580 (Outside Finland)

FranceSymbol Technologies FranceCentre d'Affaire d'Antony3 Rue de la Renaissance92184 Antony Cedex, France01-40-96-52-21 (Inside France)+33-1-40-96-52-50 (Outside France)

Germany/DeutschlandSymbol Technologies GmbHWaldstrasse 66D-63128 Dietzenbach, Germany6074-49020 (Inside Germany)+49-6074-49020 (Outside Germany)

Italy/ItaliaSymbol Technologies Italia S.R.L.Via Cristoforo Columbo, 4920090 Trezzano S/N NavigiloMilano, Italy2-484441 (Inside Italy)+39-02-484441 (Outside Italy)

Latin America Sales Support2730 University Dr.Coral Springs, FL 33065 USA1-800-347-0178 (Inside United States)+1-954-255-2610 (Outside United States)954-340-9454 (Fax)

Mexico/MéxicoSymbol Technologies Mexico Ltd.Torre PicassoBoulevard Manuel Avila Camacho No 88Lomas de Chapultepec CP 11000Mexico City, DF, Mexico5-520-1835 (Inside Mexico)+52-5-520-1835 (Outside Mexico)

Netherlands/NederlandSymbol TechnologiesKerkplein 2, 7051 CXPostbus 24 7050 AAVarsseveld, Netherlands315-271700 (Inside Netherlands)+31-315-271700 (Outside Netherlands)

Norway/NorgeSymbol’s registered and mailing address:Symbol Technologies NorwayHoybratenveien 35 CN-1055 OSLO, Norway

Symbol’s repair depot and shipping address:Symbol Technologies NorwayEnebakkveien 123N-0680 OSLO, Norway

+47 2232 4375

xvii


If you purchased the Symbol product from a Symbol Business Partner, contact that Business Partner for service.

For the latest version of this guide go to: http://www.symbol.com/manuals.

South AfricaSymbol Technologies Africa Inc.Block B2Rutherford Estate1 Scott StreetWaverly 2090 JohannesburgRepublic of South Africa11-809 5311 (Inside South Africa)+27-11-809 5311 (Outside South Africa)

Spain/EspañaSymbol Technologies S.L. Avenida de Bruselas, 22 Edificio Sauce Alcobendas, Madrid 28108 Spain Telephone: +34.91.324.4000 Service Telephone: +34.91.324.4000 Fax: +34.91.324.4010

Sweden/Sverige“Letter” address:Symbol Technologies ABBox 1354S-171 26 SOLNASweden

Visit/shipping address:Symbol Technologies ABSolna Strandväg 78S-171 54 SOLNASweden

Switchboard: 08 445 29 00 (domestic)Call Center: +46 8 445 29 29 (international)Support E-Mail: [email protected]

xviii

http://www.symbol.com/manuals

Chapter 1 Getting Started

Chapter ContentsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Unpacking the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Parts of the PPT 2800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Installing the SIM Card (PPT 2837 Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Using a Headset (PPT 2837 Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Installing Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Using the Cradle to Charge the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Charging Spare Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Using the Synchronization Cable to Charge the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Checking Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Attaching the Handstrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Attaching the Wrist Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Starting the PPT 2800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Aligning the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Setting Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Setting Up the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

1-1


1-2

Getting Started

IntroductionThis chapter explains the physical buttons and controls on the PPT 2800 terminal, how to install and charge the batteries, attach the handstrap, and start the PPT 2800 terminal for the first time.

Unpacking the TerminalCarefully remove all protective material from around the terminal and save the shipping container for later storage and shipping.

Verify that you received all equipment listed on the packing slip and inspect the equipment. If any equipment is missing or damaged, contact the Symbol Technologies Support Center immediately. See page xvi for contact information.

1-3


Parts of the PPT 2800

Figure 1-1. Parts of the PPT 2800

Power Button

Scroll Button

Function Button

Right Scan Trigger

Left Scan Trigger

Scan Trigger

Scan LED

LCD (monochrome)TFT LCD (color)

Application Buttons

Action Button

APP5 Button (Start Menu)

Scroll Button

Front View

Left View

WAN Antenna

1-4

Getting Started

Figure 1-2. Parts of the PPT 2800 (continued)

Scan Window

Lithium-Ion Battery

Battery Cover

Reset Button

Stylus

Serial Port

Battery Cover Latch

Microphone

Stylus Silo

Battery CoverLatch

IR Port

Back View

Bottom View

Top View(1D Scanning Terminal)

Top View (2D Scanning Terminal)

Handstrap Connector

Speaker

BatteryCompartment

Battery CoverSwitch

Handstrap Connectors

1-5


AccessoriesThe following accessories are available for the PPT 2800:

• Synchronization Charging Cable synchronizes the PPT 2800 with a desktop computer, and can also charge the terminal using an external power supply.

• CRD 2700-1000S Single-Slot Charging Cradle and CHX 2700-4000C 4-Slot Charging Cradle can also be used to charge the terminal.

• CRD 2700-4000E 4-Slot Ethernet Cradle charges the PPT 2800 and synchronizes the terminal with a desktop computer.

• VCD X700-R000 Vehicle Cradle powers the terminal and charges its battery, and can be used to communicate with other devices such as printers.

• MDM 3003 Snap-On Modem Module allows dial-up connection of the PPT 2800 terminal to a remote desktop computer, while maintaining the portability of the terminal.

• VCA 3000 Auto Charging Adapter connects to the cigarette lighter in a vehicle to charge the terminal.

• TRG 3000 Trigger Handle adds a trigger in scanning gun form to the PPT 2800, increasing comfort when using the terminal in scan-intensive applications for extended periods of time.

• MSR 3006 Magstripe Reader Attachment snaps on to the PPT 2800 to add magstripe capabilities.

• Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for eVC4, a development tool used to create native C and C++ applications for all Symbol terminals running the Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs operating system.

• Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for .NET, a development tool used to develop C# and VB.NET managed applications for Symbol terminals.

• Device Configuration Package (DCP) for PPT 2800w, used to create and download hex images that represent flash partitions.

1-6

Getting Started

Installing the SIM Card (PPT 2837 Only)Open the latches on the battery cover and lift it away from the PPT 2837.

Figure 1-3. Installing the SIM Card in the PPT 2837

Using a Headset (PPT 2837 Only)The headset is required for telephony operation on the PPT 2837. To use the headset, plug the headset jack into the audio connector on the top of the terminal.

Figure 1-4. Inserting Headset Jack into the PPT 2837

Metal Clip

SIM Card

Contact Area

1. Slide the metal clip to the right to release the SIM cardholder, and lift the cardholder up.

2. Insert the card between the cardholder body and the metal clip; be sure the beveled corner of the SIM card is on the bottom.

3. Close the cardholder with the contact area of the card facing down, and slide the metal clip to the left to lock it in place.

1-7


Installing BatteriesBefore using the PPT 2800, install the lithium-ion battery. The battery fits behind the battery cover on the back of the PPT 2800.

To install the battery in the PPT 2800:

1. Open the latches on the battery cover and lift the battery cover away from the PPT 2800.

Figure 1-5. Removing the Battery Cover

2. Insert the lithium-ion battery in the battery compartment with the battery tether positioned properly (as shown below), making sure the battery snaps into place.

Figure 1-6. Inserting the Battery

3. Replace the battery cover by inserting the bottom first, then pressing the top in firmly while securing the latches.

Latch

Latch

Tether

1-8

Getting Started

Note: Position the battery latches completely open while placing the battery cover on the terminal.

Charge the battery in the terminal for approximately 2 1/2 hours before initial use.

Charging the Battery

Note: To charge the battery for your mobile device, battery and charger temperatures must be between +32° F and +104° F (0° C and +40° C).

Before using the terminal for the first time, charge the battery. Also, when battery voltage is low, a warning message appears indicating the battery needs to be charged. Charge the battery using either the CRD 2700 cradle or the Synchronization Cable.

The terminal is equipped with a memory backup battery which automatically charges from the fully-charged lithium-ion battery. This backup battery retains data in memory when the terminal’s battery is removed, and takes about 10 hours to charge when you first use the terminal.

Note: DO NOT remove the lithium-ion battery within the first ten hours of use. If you remove the battery before the backup battery is fully charged, data may be lost.

1-9


Using the Cradle to Charge the BatteryTo charge the terminal’s battery using the CRD 2700 cradle:

1. Connect the power supply to the power port on the back of the cradle, and the other end of the power supply to a wall outlet.

Figure 1-7. Connecting the Power Supply

2. Connect the cradle to the desktop computer by plugging the serial cable into the serial port on the back of the cradle, and the other end of the cable into the serial port on the computer.

Figure 1-8. Connecting the Cradle to the Desktop Computer

Power Port

Serial Port

1-10

Getting Started

3. Insert the PPT 2800 terminal in the cradle.

Figure 1-9. Inserting the Terminal in the Cradle

4. The Terminal Charge LED turns red to indicate charging, then green when the battery is fully charged.

Note: If the cradle is not connected to the desktop computer via serial cable, the Terminal Charge LED shuts off when the battery is fully charged.

The terminal’s battery is fully charged after approximately 2 1/2 hours.

Note: If the battery in the terminal is low, the Terminal Charge LED may flicker or turn yellow during an ActiveSync operation. The LED returns to red when the operation is complete.

Charging Spare BatteriesTo charge a spare battery, insert the battery in the spare battery charging slot in the back of the cradle, with the contacts facing down and toward the back of the cradle. Press the battery down into the slot until firmly seated.

Terminal Charge LED

1-11


The Spare Battery Charge LED turns red to indicate charging, then green when the battery is fully charged. The battery is fully charged after approximately 2 1/2 hours.

Figure 1-10. Charging the Spare Battery

Using the Synchronization Cable to Charge the BatteryTo charge the terminal’s battery using the optional Synchronization Cable:

1. Insert the cable into the bottom of the terminal.

Figure 1-11. Inserting the Cable in the Terminal

Spare BatteryCharge LED

Synchronization Cable

1-12

Getting Started

2. Plug the power cable into a wall outlet and plug the other end into the battery charging receptacle on the side of the Synchronization Cable.

Figure 1-12. Connecting the Power Cable

Battery ChargingReceptacle

1-13


Checking Battery Power To check whether the battery in the terminal is charged, tap Start - Settings - System - Power to display the Power window.

Figure 1-13. Power Window

To save battery power, set the terminal to turn off after a specified number of minutes on battery power.

1-14

Getting Started

Attaching the HandstrapThe PPT 2800 has an optional handstrap which increases comfort when holding the terminal for extended periods of time. To attach the handstrap to the back of the terminal:

1. Thread the round metal piece through the metal handstrap connector on the back of the terminal.

2. Slide the flat metal piece into the handstrap connection on the bottom of the terminal.

Figure 1-14. Attaching the Handstrap

3. Adjust the velcro strap to fit your hand.

Attaching the Wrist StrapAn optional wrist strap is available which helps prevent damage to the terminal if dropped. To attach the wrist strap:

1. Thread the elastic band on the wrist strap through the metal handstrap connector on the back of the terminal.

Thread round metal piece through this connector.

Slide flat metal piece up and into this connector.

1-15


2. Slip the strap through the elastic band on the other side of the connector, and pull it through to secure the strap to the connector.

Figure 1-15. Attaching the Wriststrap

3. Slide your hand through the strap.

Thread elastic band through this connector.

1-16

Getting Started

Starting the PPT 2800After installing and charging the battery, start the terminal by pressing the red power button. If the terminal does not power on, reset it. See Performing a Cold Boot on page 2-28.

Figure 1-16. Power Button

As the terminal initializes its unique Flash File system, the Symbol splash screen displays for about a minute. When the Welcome screen appears, tap anywhere on the screen to continue to the Align screen.

Aligning the ScreenTo align the PPT 2800 so the cursor on the touch screen aligns with the tip of the stylus:

1. If necessary, adjust the contrast on the PPT 2800 so the screen is readable. See Controlling the Contrast/Backlight on page 2-3 for instructions.

2. Remove the stylus from its storage silo on the back of the PPT 2800.3. Tap the center of each target that appears on the screen with the tip of the stylus.

Figure 1-17. Tapping the Target

PowerButton

Tap the target firmly and accuratelyat each location on the screen. The

target will continue to move untilthe screen is aligned.

1-17


4. Follow the directions on the screen which provide a simple exercise illustrating how to use the stylus and pop-up menus.

Figure 1-18. Using Pop-up Menus

5. Use the drop-down menu to set the time zone, and tap Next.

Figure 1-19. Setting Time Zone on the PPT 2800

1-18

Getting Started

Note: These initial setup windows appear upon each cold boot.

Setting Time and DateThe Time and Date window does not appear after setting the time zone. Use the clock control panel applet to set the time and date after a cold boot.

Figure 1-20. Setting Time and Date

Setting Up the TerminalRefer to the following chapters to set up the terminal:

• To customize settings on the PPT 2800, see Chapter 3, Customizing the PPT 2800.• To set up ActiveSync to synchronize the terminal with the desktop computer, see

Chapter 4, Communications.• To set up connections with a network, ISP, or e-mail server, see Chapter 9,

Connections.• To configure the PPT 284X for Spectrum24, see Chapter 10, Spectrum24 Network

Configuration.

1-19


• To configure the PPT 2837 for WWAN support, see Chapter 11, Wireless Wide Area Network Configuration.

• To install development software on the development PC, see Chapter 12, Software Installation on Development PC.

• To configure the terminal using the Terminal Configuration Manager, see Chapter 13, Configuring the Terminal.

1-20

Chapter 2 Operating the PPT 2800

Chapter ContentsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Using the Power Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Controlling the Contrast/Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3PPT 2800 Application Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Using the Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Using the Navigation Bar and Command Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Status Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Speaker Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Battery Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Connectivity Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Time Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Instant Message Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12E-Mail Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Multiple Notification Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Selecting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Using Pop-up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Entering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Entering Information Using the Input Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Selecting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Writing on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Drawing on the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Recording a Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Entering Data via the Bar Code Scanner (Scan Wedge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Using My Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

2-1


Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Scanning PDF417 Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Resetting the PPT 2800 Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Performing a Warm Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Performing a Cold Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

2-2

Operating the PPT 2800

Introduction

This chapter provides basic instructions for using and navigating the PPT 2800 terminal.

Using the Power ButtonPress the red power button on the lower left-hand side of the terminal to turn the PPT 2800 on and off.

Controlling the Contrast/BacklightUse the Function button to adjust the contrast of the screen and control the backlight.

Figure 2-1. Power and Function Buttons

To adjust the contrast (monochrome LCD) or backlight (color TFT LCD):

1. Press and hold the Function button. 2. Press the “up” scroll button at the top of the terminal to lighten the screen, or the

“down” scroll button to darken the screen.To turn the backlight on or off:

1. Press and hold the Function button. 2. Press any Application button.

Function ButtonPower Button

2-3


PPT 2800 Application ButtonsTable 2-1 lists the default programs accessed by pressing an application button on the front of the terminal. The icons on the buttons identify the programs they access.

To assign a different application to each application button, see Buttons on page 3-11.

Using the StylusThe PPT 2800 has a stylus for selecting items and entering information. The stylus functions as a mouse.

• Tap: Touch the screen once with the stylus to open items and select options.• Drag: Hold the stylus on the screen and drag across the screen to select text and

images. Drag in a list to select multiple items.• Tap-and-hold: Tap and hold the stylus on an item to see a list of actions available

for that item. On the pop-up menu that appears, tap the action to perform.

Table 2-1. Program Icons

Icon Button Program Description

App 1 Calendar Keep track of appointments and create meeting requests.

App 2 Contacts Keep track of friends and colleagues.

App 3 Tasks Keep track of tasks.

App 4 Notes Create handwritten or typed notes, drawings, and recordings.

2-4


Today ScreenWhen the terminal is turned on for the first time each day (or after 4 hours of inactivity), the Today screen appears. It can also display by tapping Start - Today. On the Today screen, important information for the day is displayed.

Figure 2-2. Today Screen

Note: The Today screen varies depending on the terminal configuration.

To customize the Today screen, tap Start - Settings - Today icon. Use the Appearance tab to customize the background and the Items tab to change the list and order of items that appear on the screen.

Tap to switch to a program.

Tap to change volume or mute all sounds.

Tap to change the date and time.

Tap to open an item.

The day at a glance.

Tap to create a new item. Tap to view connection status.

2-5


Using the Navigation Bar and Command BarThe navigation bar at the top of the screen displays the active program, various status icons (see Table 2-2) and current time.

Use the command bar at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in programs. The command bar includes menu names, buttons and the Input Panel button. To create a new item in the current program, tap New. To see the name of a button, hold the stylus on the button. Drag the stylus off the button so the command is not carried out.

Figure 2-3. Screen Navigation

Tap to change volume or mute all sounds.

Tap to quickly select a recently used program.

Tap to select a program.

Tap to see additional programs.Tap to customize the device.

New button.Input Panel button

Menu names Buttons

Tap to close program.

2-6


Status IconsThe status icons listed in Table 2-2 are located on the navigation bar at the top of the screen.

Table 2-2. Status Icons

Icon Function Description

Speaker Turns all sounds on and off.

Battery Backup battery is very low (not enabled).

Main battery is charging.*

Main battery is low.

Main battery is very low.

Main battery is full.*

Connectivity Connection is active.

Synchronization is occurring.

No connection.

Instant Message Notification that one or more instant messages were received.

E-Mail Notification that one or more e-mail messages were received.

Time and Next Appointment

Displays current time in analog or digital format.

Multiple Notifications There are more notification icons than can be displayed. Tap to display remaining icons.

* Only appears in the Time and Next Appointment window.

X

2-7


Speaker IconTo adjust the system volume use the Speaker icon in the Navigation bar.

1. Tap the Speaker icon. The Volume window appears.

Figure 2-4. Volume Window

2. Tap and move the slide bar to adjust the volume.3. Select the On or Off radio button to turn the volume on or off.

Note: The system volume can also be adjusted using the Sounds & Notifications window. See Sounds & Notifications on page 3-24 for more information.

2-8


Battery IconBattery icons display on the Navigation Bar when the main battery or backup battery power falls below a predetermined level. A Battery window also appears indicating the status of the main or backup battery. On terminals with color displays, the Main Battery Low text is blue and the Main Battery Very Low text is red.

Figure 2-5. Battery Status Window

Note: The battery status can also be viewed using the Power window. See Power on page 3-43 for more information.

2-9


Connectivity IconThe Connectivity icon indicates the communication status of the terminal when it’s connecting to the internet or desktop computer.

Figure 2-6. Connectivity Window

2-10


Time IconThe Time icon displays the current time in a digital or analog format. To change the time format, tap and hold the Time icon until a menu appears. Select the desired format.

Figure 2-7. Time Icon Format Menu

To display current date, time and appointments, tap the Time icon to display the Time and Next Appointment window.

Figure 2-8. Time and Next Appointment Window

Analog ClockDigital Clock

Battery Status IconUpcoming Appointments

Current Date and Time

2-11


The window displays the current date and time, the battery status and any upcoming appointments in the Calendar.

Instant Message IconThe Instant Message icon provides notification when MSN Messenger receives a new message. See MSN® Messenger on page 7-10 for more information.

Figure 2-9. MSN Messenger Window

E-Mail IconThe E-Mail icon provides notification when e-mails are received. See Inbox on page 6-14 for more information.

Figure 2-10. New E-mail Messages Window

2-12


Multiple Notification IconThe Multiple Notification icon appears when two or more message notifications occur. Tap the icon to display the multiple notification icons.

Figure 2-11. Multiple Notifications Icon

2-13


Selecting ProgramsTo select a program, tap Start - Programs, then the program name. (To select which programs appear on the Program menu, see Chapter 3, Customizing the PPT 2800.)

Figure 2-12. Start Menu

Note: Some programs have abbreviated labels for check boxes and drop-down lists. To see the full label, hold the stylus on the label. Drag the stylus off the label so that the command is not carried out.

Using Pop-up MenusUse pop-up menus to choose an action for an item. For example, use the pop-up menu in the contact list to delete a contact, make a copy of a contact, or send an e-mail message to a contact. The actions in the pop-up menus vary from program to program.

2-14


To access a pop-up menu, hold the stylus on an item. When the menu appears, lift the stylus, and tap the action to perform, or tap outside the menu to close it without performing an action.

Figure 2-13. Pop-up Menu

NotificationsThe PPT 2800 provides a reminder when you have something to do. For example, for a Calendar appointment, a task with a due date in Tasks, or an alarm in Clock, you'll be notified in any of the following ways:

• a message box appears on the screen• a selectable sound plays• a light flashes on the terminal.

To choose reminder types and sounds for the terminal, tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Sounds & Notifications. Select the desired options.

Tap and hold to display the pop-up menu.

Lift the stylus and tap the action.

Tap outside the menu to close it without performing an action.

2-15


Entering Information To enter information:

• Use the input panel to enter typed text, either using the soft keyboard or writing characters.

• Write directly on the screen.• Draw pictures on the screen.• Speak into the microphone to record a message.• Scan bar code data into data fields.• Use Microsoft® ActiveSync® to synchronize or copy information from the desktop

computer to the terminal. For more information on ActiveSync, see Chapter 4, Communications or ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer.

Note: Microsoft Transcriber is not included on the PPT 2800. If desired, download Transcriber from Microsoft’s website and install it in the terminal’s RAM.

Entering Information Using the Input Panel To use the input panel to enter information in any program, either type using the soft keyboard, or write using Block Recognizer or Letter Recognizer. Characters appear as typed text on the screen.

To show or hide the input panel, tap the Input Panel button. Tap the arrow next to this button to view input methods.

Figure 2-14. Input Panel Button

Input Panel ButtonTap to see choices.

Select an input method.

Select input method settings.

2-16


The terminal anticipates words as you enter them in the Input Panel and displays the anticipated word above the input panel. Tap the anticipated word to insert it into the text at the insertion point. The more you use the terminal, the more words it learns to anticipate.

To change input settings, such as the number of words suggested at one time, tap Options from the Input Panel menu, and tap the tabs to see each setting window.

Figure 2-15. Input Panel Options

Using the Soft KeyboardTo type with the soft keyboard:

1. Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, then Keyboard.2. On the soft keyboard, tap the keys with the stylus.

Figure 2-16. Soft Keyboard

Tap here if this is the right word.

2-17


Using the Block RecognizerTo use Block Recognizer:

1. Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, then Block Recognizer.2. Write a letter in the left side of the box, or a number in the right side, using special

character strokes.

Figure 2-17. Block Recognizer

When writing a letter, it is converted to typed text on the screen. For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer, with Block Recognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area, or see Appendix A, Block Recognizer Characters.

Using the Letter RecognizerTo use Letter Recognizer:

1. Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button, then Letter Recognizer.2. Write letters or numbers in the writing area. Write capital letters in the left side of

the box, numbers in the right side, and lower case letters in the center.

Figure 2-18. Letter Recognizer

When writing a letter, it is converted to typed text on the screen. For instructions on using Letter Recognizer, with Letter Recognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area.

2-18


Selecting TextTo edit or format typed text, select it by dragging the stylus across the text. Cut, copy, and/or paste text by holding the selected words then tapping an editing command on the pop-up menu, or by tapping the command on the Edit menu.

Writing on the ScreenIn any program that accepts writing, such as the Notes program and the Notes tab in Calendar, Contacts, and Tasks, use the stylus to write directly on the screen.

To write on the screen, tap the Pen button to switch to writing mode. Lines appear on the screen as a guide.

Figure 2-19. Writing on the Screen

Note: Some programs that accept writing do not have the Pen button. See the documentation for that program to find out how to switch to writing mode.

Tap the Pen button and use the stylus like a pen.

2-19


Selecting WritingTo select writing to edit or format:

1. Tap and hold the stylus next to the text to select until the insertion point appears.2. Drag the stylus across the text.

If you accidentally write on the screen, tap Tools - Undo and try again. Select text by tapping the Pen button to deselect it, then dragging the stylus across the screen.

Cut, copy, and paste written text in the same way as with typed text: tap and hold the selected words, then tap the command from the pop-up menu, or select the command from the Edit menu.

Converting Writing to TextTo convert writing to text, tap Tools - Recognize.

To convert certain words, select them before tapping Recognize on the Tools menu (or tap and hold the selected words, then tap Recognize on the pop-up menu). If a word is not recognized, it is left as writing.

Figure 2-20. Writing on the Screen

The writing is turned into text.

Select the text to convert and tap Recognize on the pop-up menu.

2-20


If the conversion is incorrect, select different words from a list of alternates or return to the original writing. Tap and hold the incorrect word only. On the pop-up menu, tap Alternates. A list of alternate words appears. Tap the word to use, or tap the writing at the top of the menu to return to the original writing.

Figure 2-21. Alternate List

Writing Tips• Write neatly.• Write on the lines and draw descenders below the line. Cross of the “t” and write

apostrophes below the top line so they are not confused with the word above. Write periods and commas above the line.

• For better recognition, try increasing the zoom level to 300% using the Tools menu.• Leave large gaps between words so the terminal can easily tell where words begin

and end.• Hyphenated words, foreign words that use special characters such as accents, and

some punctuation cannot be converted.• If you add writing to a word to change it (such as changing a “3” to an “8”) after you

attempt to recognize the word, the added writing is not included on the next recognize attempt.

Tap to return to the original writing.

Or, tap the word to select it.

2-21


Drawing on the ScreenDrawing on the screen is similar to writing on the screen. To create a drawing, cross three ruled lines on the first stroke. A drawing box appears. Subsequent strokes in or touching the drawing box become part of the drawing. Drawings that do not cross three ruled lines are treated as writing.

Figure 2-22. Drawing on the Screen

Note: To change the zoom level, tap Tools, then a zoom level.

Selecting a DrawingTo select a drawing to edit or format, tap and hold the stylus on the drawing until the selection handle appears.

To select multiple drawings, deselect the Pen button, then drag to select the drawings.

To cut, copy, and paste drawings, tap and hold the selected drawing, then tap an editing command on the pop-up menu, or tap the command on the Edit menu. To resize a drawing, deselect the Pen button and drag a selection handle.

The drawing box indicates the boundaries of the drawing.

Pen button.

2-22


Recording a MessageRecord a message to capture thoughts, reminders, and phone numbers. In Calendar, Tasks, and Contacts, include a recording in the Notes tab. In the Notes program, either create a stand-alone recording or include a recording in a written note. To include the recording in a note, open the note first.

To create a recording:

1. Hold the terminal’s microphone near the sound source.2. Tap and hold the Record button and begin recording.3. When finished, tap the Stop button. Two beeps sound. The new recording appears

in the note list or as an embedded icon.4. To play the recording, tap it in the list or tap its icon in the note.

Figure 2-23. Recording Window

Entering Data via the Bar Code Scanner (Scan Wedge)Using the Scan Wedge program, the integrated bar code scanner on the terminal can scan data into data fields in the same way data is entered via the keyboard. See HTML Scan Demo on page B-5 for more information.

Indicates an embedded recording.

Tap to begin recording.

Tap to show or hide the recording toolbar.

2-23


Using My TextWhen using Inbox or MSN Messenger, use My Text to quickly insert preset or frequently used messages into the text entry area. To insert a message, tap My Text and tap a message.

Figure 2-24. Using My Text

Note: You can add text after inserting a My Text message before sending it.

To edit a My Text message, in the Tools menu, tap Edit, then My Text Messages. Select the message to edit and make the changes.

Tap to select a prewritten message.

2-24


Finding InformationThe Find feature locates information. Tap Start - Find. Enter the search text, select a data type, then tap Go.

To find information taking up storage space on the terminal, select Larger than 64 KB in Type.

Also use File Explorer to find files and organize them into folders. Tap Start - Programs - File Explorer.

Figure 2-25. File Explorer

Note: To move files in File Explorer, tap and hold the item, then tap Cut or Copy and Paste on the pop-up menu.

Select the sort order for the list.

Tap the folder name to open it.

Tap and hold to create a new folder.

Tap to change folders.

2-25


ScanningThe PPT 2800 has an integrated scanner which collects data by scanning one or two-dimensional bar codes. See Appendix B, Demo Program for a sample scanning application.

To scan bar codes with the PPT 2800, first start the scanning application. Then:

1. Aim the scan window at the bar code.2. Press either the right, left, or center scan trigger. Make sure the red scan beam

covers the entire bar code. The green scan LED lights and a beep sounds to indicate a successful decode.

Figure 2-26. Scanning

Scanning PDF417 Bar CodesThe 2D scanning PPT 2800 terminal supports PDF417 bar code scanning. The raster pattern has multiple scanning rows to accommodate the PDF417 symbol’s multiple rows.

1. Point the scanner at the bar code and press the trigger.2. Center the aiming pattern on the bar code.3. As the raster pattern spreads, keep the pattern horizontal to the bar code.

Figure 2-27. Raster Pattern

4. The terminal indicates a successful scan by changing the LED from red to green, beeping one or more times, and/or displaying the bar code data on the screen.

3/4” 3/4”

2-26


“Tall” PDF Bar CodesIf the PDF417 symbol is “tall,” the vertical scan pattern may not be high enough to cover it. Move the scan pattern slowly down toward the bottom of the symbol, keeping the beam horizontal to the rows, then slowly back up toward the top.

Figure 2-28. Scanning Tall PDF Bar Code

The scan beam does not have to be perfectly parallel with the top and bottom of the symbol (up to a 4o tilt will work).

Resetting the PPT 2800 TerminalIf the PPT 2800 terminal stops responding to input from buttons or the screen, reset it by performing a warm or cold boot.

Performing a Warm BootA warm boot restarts the terminal and saves all stored records and entries.

CautionFiles that remain open during a warm boot may not be retained.

2-27


To perform a warm boot, hold down both the up and down scroll buttons, then press the App 4 button.

Figure 2-29. Warm Boot Buttons

Performing a Cold BootA cold boot also restarts the PPT 2800 terminal, but erases all stored records and entries not saved in the Flash File system. Therefore, never perform a cold boot unless a warm boot does not solve the problem.

CautionWith a cold boot, the current date and time, formats, preferences, and oth-er settings are restored to their factory default settings, unless they are re-stored using .reg files located in the Flash File system.

Note: Restore any data previously synchronized with the computer during the next ActiveSync operation.

Up & Down Scroll Buttons

App 4 Button

2-28


To perform a cold boot:

1. Remove the battery cover.2. While holding down the Function button, use the tip of the stylus (or similar object

without a sharp tip) to gently press the reset button.

Figure 2-30. Cold Boot Buttons

3. Replace the battery cover and press the Power button.4. As the terminal initializes its unique Flash File system, the Symbol splash screen

displays for about a minute. 5. See Aligning the Screen on page 1-17 to perform an initial setup of the terminal.

Reset Button

Function Button

2-29


2-30

Chapter 3 Customizing the PPT 2800

Chapter ContentsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Adjusting Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Adding Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Adding a Program from the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Adding a Program to the Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Adjusting Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Personal Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6System Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Connections Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Assigning User-Written Applications to Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Up/Down Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Input Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Word Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16New Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Owner Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Hint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Sounds & Notifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

3-1


Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Today . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

About. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Copyrights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Personal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41Running Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43Optimizing Battery Life. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Regional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45Remove Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Wakeups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51System and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

3-2

Customizing the PPT 2800

Introduction

This chapter provides basic instructions for customizing the terminal by adjusting settings and installing additional software.

Adjusting SettingsTo view available options for terminal settings, tap Start - Settings, then the Personal or System tab at the bottom of the screen.

Adjust the following:

• Clock: change the time or set alarms• Buttons: assign programs to the application hardware buttons• Menus: customize what appears on the Start menu and enable a pop-up menu

from the New button• Owner Information: enter contact information• Password: limit access to the terminal• Power: maximize battery life• Today: customize the information displayed on the Today screen.

3-3


Adding ProgramsInstall the appropriate software on the desktop computer before installing it on the terminal.

1. Tap Start, then Settings - System tab - About. In the Version tab, note the information in Processor.

2. Download the program to the desktop computer (or insert the CD or disk that contains the program into the desktop computer). Typical file formats include a single *.xip file, *.exe file, a *.zip file, or a Setup.exe file.

3. Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation that comes with the program. Many programs provide special installation instructions.

4. Connect the terminal and desktop computer.5. Double-click the *.exe file.

If the file is an installer, the installation wizard begins. Follow the directions on the screen. Once the software is installed on the desktop computer, the installer transfers the software to the terminal.

If the file is not an installer, an error message states that the program is valid but is designed for a different type of computer. Move this file to the terminal. If you cannot find installation instructions for the program in the Read Me file or documentation, use ActiveSync Explore to copy the program file to the Program Files folder on the terminal. For more information on copying files using ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help.

When installation is complete, tap Start, Programs, then the program icon to select it.

Adding a Program from the Internet1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - About. In the Version tab, note the information

in Processor. 2. Download the program to the terminal from the Internet using Pocket Internet

Explorer. Typical file formats include a single *.xip, *.exe, *.zip file, or a Setup.exe file.

3. Read any installation instructions, Read Me files, or documentation that comes with the program. Many programs provide special installation instructions.

4. Tap the file, such as a *.xip or *.exe file, to launch the installation wizard. Follow the directions on the screen.

3-4


Adding a Program to the Start MenuTap Start - Settings - Menus - Start Menu tab, then the check box for the program.

Figure 3-1. Menus Window

If the program does not appear, either use File Explorer to move the program to the Start Menu folder or use ActiveSync on the desktop computer to create a shortcut to the program and place the shortcut in the Start Menu folder.

Using File Explorer to Add to the Start Menu1. Tap Start - Programs - File Explorer, and locate the program (tap the folder list,

labeled My Documents by default, then My Device to list all folders on the terminal).

2. Tap and hold the program and tap Cut on the pop-up menu. 3. Open the Start Menu folder in the Windows folder, tap and hold a blank area of the

window, and tap Paste on the pop-up menu. The program appears on the Start menu.

For more information on using File Explorer, see Finding Information on page 2-25.

3-5


Note: Avoid placing direct links in the Start Menu to programs located in flash memory (Application or Platform). Copy these programs to the Windows folder first.

Using ActiveSync to Add to the Start Menu1. Use the Explorer in ActiveSync on the desktop computer to explore the terminal’s

files and locate the program. 2. Right-click the program, then click Create Shortcut. 3. Move the shortcut to the Start Menu folder in the Windows folder. The shortcut

appears on the Start menu. For more information, see ActiveSync Help.

Adjusting SettingsTo view available options for terminal settings, tap Start - Settings. Adjust the settings in either the Personal tab or the System tab.

Personal Tab

Figure 3-2. Settings - Personal Tab

3-6


Table 3-1 lists the applications available in the Personal tab.

Table 3-1. Personal Tab Applications

Icon Description

Customize Up/Down key control. See Buttons on page 3-11 for more information. (The Program Buttons tab in this window is currently not supported.)

Switch input methods and set input options. See Input on page 3-13 for more information.

Configure the items that appear in the Start menu. See Menus on page 3-16 for more information.

Change owner's personal profiles. See Owner Information on page 3-18 for more information.

Change owner's password and set security options. See Passwords on page 3-21 for more information.

Select the type of actions for which require sounds and customize the notification about the different events. See Sounds & Notifications on page 3-24 for more information.

Customize the information displayed on the Today screen. See Today on page 3-26 for more information.

3-7


System Tab

Figure 3-3. Settings - System Tab

Table 3-2 lists the applications available in the System tab.

Table 3-2. System Tab Applications

Icon Description

Provides device information and name. See About on page 3-28 for more information.

Customize when and for how long the backlight should stay on. See Backlight on page 3-31 for more information.

View and modify digital certificates which are used by some applications for establishing trust for secure communications. See Certificates on page 3-34 for more information.

Change date, time and time zone information. See Clock on page 3-36 for more information.

Color Display Monochrome Display

3-8


Adjust the contrast on monochrome terminals.

Adjust the allocation of storage and program memory. See Memory on page 3-40 for more information.

View battery status and change power management options. See Power on page 3-43 for more information.

Change how numbers, currencies, dates and times are displayed. See Regional Settings on page 3-45 for more information.

Remove loaded programs from RAM. See Remove Programs on page 3-48 for more information.

Align the touch screen and enable ClearType fonts. See Screen on page 3-49 for more information.

Change settings unique to the terminal. See Symbol Settings on page 3-50 for more information.

Table 3-2. System Tab Applications (Continued)

Icon Description

3-9


Connections Tab

Figure 3-4. Settings - Connections Tab

Table 3-3 lists the applications available in the Connections tab.

Table 3-3. Connections Tab Applications

Icon Description

Modify IrDA connection settings.

Change connection information. See Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network on page 4-19 for more information.

3-10


ButtonsThe physical application buttons on the front of the terminal access, by default, Calendar, Contacts, Tasks and Notes. To re-assign a different application to a button:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Buttons icon.

Figure 3-5. Buttons Window

2. Tap the button on the list that to change, then use the Button assignment drop-down menu to select a new application for that button.

3. Tap OK.

Assigning User-Written Applications to ButtonsUse Regmerge.dll to modify the registry during a cold boot to assign user-written applications to the application buttons. These buttons remain assigned after a cold boot. See the Help file on the SDK for more information.

Note: Although located in the Flash File System, we recommend copying user applications to the Windows directory (using CopyFile.dll) and running them from there. See the Help file for more information.

3-11


Up/Down ControlTo set the key repeat rate:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Buttons icon - Up/Down Control tab.

Figure 3-6. Buttons Window - Up/Down Control Tab

2. Adjust the Delay before first repeat: slide bar to change the time elapsed before scrolling begins.

3. Adjust the Repeat rate slide bar to change the time it takes to scroll from one item to the next.

4. Tap ok.

3-12


InputUse the Input window to switch input methods and set input options.

Input MethodTo select an input method:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Input icon - Input Method tab.

Figure 3-7. Input Window - Input Method Tab

2. From the Input method: drop-down list, select the input method.3. Make any additional desired changes to the settings.4. Tap ok.

3-13


Word CompletionTo adjust how suggested words pop-up in a window above the input panel:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Input icon - Word Completion tab.

Figure 3-8. Input Window - Word Completion Tab

2. Make the desired changes to the settings.3. Tap ok.

3-14


OptionsTo adjust the options for writing and recording:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Input icon - Options tab.

Figure 3-9. Input Window - Options tab

2. Make the desired changes to the settings.3. Tap ok.

3-15


MenusUse the Menus window to change the items that appear in the Start menu.

Start MenuTo change the items that appear in the Start menu:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Menus icon - Start Menu tab.

Figure 3-10. Menus Window - Start Menu Tab

2. Select the programs to appear in the Start menu.3. Tap ok.

Create subfolders and shortcuts to appear under Start menu. In ActiveSync on the desktop computer, click Explore. Double-click My Pocket PC, double-click Windows, double-click Start Menu and then create the folders and shortcuts.

3-16


New MenuTo enable the New menu:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Menus icon - New Menu tab.

Figure 3-11. Menus Window - New Menu Tab

2. Select the Turn on the New button menu check box. 3. Select the items to appear on the menu.

An arrow appears next to New in the command bar of certain programs such as Pocket Word, Pocket Excel, Contacts, Calendar and Tasks. Tap this arrow and then tap a new item to create.

4. Tap ok.

3-17


Owner InformationUse the Owner Information window to enter information about the owner. The information can be displayed when the terminal is turned on.

IdentificationTo enter personal information:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Owner Information icon - Identification tab.

Figure 3-12. Owner Information Window - Identification Tab

2. Fill in or edit the data as desired.3. To have this information display when the terminal is started, select the Show

information when device is turned on check box.4. Tap ok.

3-18


NotesTo add more information about the owner:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Owner Information icon - Notes tab.

Figure 3-13. Owner Information Window - Notes Tab

2. Enter information in the Notes: box.3. To have this information display when the terminal is started, select the Show

information when device is turned on check box.4. Tap ok.

3-19


After the information is entered and the Show information when device is turned on check boxes are selected, the Welcome window appears whenever the terminal is powered on. Tap the screen with the stylus to exit the Welcome window.

Figure 3-14. Welcome Window

3-20


PasswordsUse the Password window to set a password to disable unauthorized access to the terminal.

PasswordIf the terminal is configured to connect to a network, use a strong (difficult to figure out) password to help protect network security. Password cracking tools continue to improve and the computers used to crack passwords are more powerful than ever.

CautionIf the terminal becomes corrupt and a warm boot doesn't work, perform a cold boot. Performing a cold boot erases all files (including the user password), user created data and user installed programs. Data saved in flash memory or a memory card is not lost.

1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Password icon - Password tab.

Figure 3-15. Password Window - Password Tab

2. Select Prompt if device unused for check box to enable password protection.3. From the drop-down list, select a time value for the protection to take affect after

non-use.

3-21


4. Select either Simple 4 digit password or Strong alphanumeric password radio button to set a password.

5. For a simple password, In the Password field, enter a four digit password.6. For a stronger password:

a. In the Password: field, enter a password. A strong password must contain at least seven characters that are a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters, numerals and punctuation.

Figure 3-16. Alphanumeric Password

b. In the Confirm: field, re-enter the password.7. Tap ok.

3-22


HintSet a password hint:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Password icon - Hint tab.

Figure 3-17. Password Window - Hint Tab

2. In the text box, enter a password hint.3. Tap ok.

3-23


Sounds & NotificationsUse the Sounds & Notifications window to set event sounds and volume options.

VolumeTo adjust the system volume and enable event sounds:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Sounds & Notifications icon - Volume tab.

Figure 3-18. Sounds & Notifications Window - Volume Tab

2. Use the slide bar to change the system volume.3. Select the desired Enable Sound options.4. Tap ok.

Note: Turning off sounds saves power and prolongs battery life.

3-24


NotificationsUse the Notifications tab to customize event notifications.

1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Sounds & Notifications icon - Notifications tab.

Figure 3-19. Sounds & Notifications Window - Notifications Tab

2. Select the event name from the Select an event drop-down menu.3. Select the Play sound check box to enable the sound notification.4. Select a sound from the drop-down list.5. Tap ok.

3-25


TodayUse the Today window to customize the Today screen.

AppearanceTo change the appearance of the Today screen:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Personal tab - Today icon - Appearance tab.

Figure 3-20. Today Window - Appearance Tab

2. Select the desired theme for the Today screen background. To use a customized background, select Use this picture as the background check box and tap Browse to locate the desired file on the terminal.

3. To beam a theme to another terminal, select the desired theme and tap Beam.4. To delete a theme, select the desired theme and tap Delete.5. Tap ok.

3-26


ItemsTo select items that appear on the Today screen:

1. Tap Start - Settings Personal tab - Today icon - Items tab.

Figure 3-21. Today Window - Items Tab

2. Select the items to appear on the Today screen. To customize the information further, select an information type and then tap Options (not available for all information types).

3. Tap ok.

3-27


AboutUse the About window to view general system properties, change memory settings, input device name and view copyright information.

VersionThe Version tab displays general system settings:

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - About icon - Version tab.

Figure 3-22. About Window - Version Tab

2. Tap ok.

3-28


Device IDUse the Device ID tab to customize the name and description of the terminal:

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - About icon - Device ID tab.

Figure 3-23. About Window - Device ID Tab

2. In the Device name: field, enter a name for the terminal. Do not use spaces.3. In the Description: field, enter a description for the terminal.4. Tap ok.

3-29


CopyrightsUse the Copyrights tab to view any relevant copyright information.

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - About icon - Copyrights tab.

Figure 3-24. About Window - Copyrights Tab

2. Tap ok.

3-30


BacklightUse the Backlight window to conserve battery power, to turn off the backlight when the terminal is idle and to adjust the brightness level. There are also options to turn on the backlight when you tap the screen or press a key.

Battery PowerTo set the backlight settings when using battery power:

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Backlight icon - Battery Power tab.

Figure 3-25. Backlight Window - Battery Power Tab

2. Make the desired selections. See Table 3-4 for backlight settings.3. Tap ok.

Note: When performing a cold boot all settings selected in this view return to the default settings. The settings are maintained after a warm boot.

3-31


Note: To change the screen brightness level, see Brightness on page 3-33.

External PowerTo set the backlight settings when using external AC power:

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Backlight icon - External Power tab.

Figure 3-26. Backlight Window - External Power Tab

Table 3-4. Battery Power Backlight Settings

Status Conditions of Light On/Off Default (Cold Boot)

On Battery Power Select the Turn off backlight if device is not used for check box to turn off the backlight after a certain period of time has passed unused. Period of time can be selected from the list. Available times are 10 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min and 5 min.

Check box is selected. Default time is one minute.

Select the Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped check box to turn on the backlight when a key is pressed or the screen is tapped.

Check box is selected.

3-32


2. Make the desired selections. See Table 3-5 for backlight settings.3. Tap ok.

BrightnessTo set the screen’s brightness level:

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Backlight icon - Brightness tab.

Figure 3-27. Backlight Window

Table 3-5. External Power Backlight Settings

Status Conditions of Light On/Off Default (Cold Boot)

On External Power Select the Turn off backlight if device is not used for check box to turn off the backlight after a certain period of time has passed unused. Period of time can be selected from the list. Available times are 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min, 5 min, 6 min, 7 min, 8 min, 9 min, and 10 min.

Check box is not selected. Default time is one minute.

Select the Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped check box to turn on the backlight when a key is pressed or the screen is tapped.

Check box is selected.

3-33


2. Select a brightness level from the menu.3. Tap ok.

Note: When performing a cold boot all settings selected in this view return to the default settings. The settings are maintained after a warm boot.

CertificatesPublic key certificates can be added and deleted. These certificates help establish a specific identity when logging onto a secured network, such as a corporate network. Certificates also help establish the identity of other connecting computers, such as servers. This helps prevent unauthorized users from accessing the terminal and information.

Note: Two types of certificates can be stored on the terminal: personal certificates that establish the personal identity and root certificates that establish the identity of connecting servers. The terminal may include a set of preinstalled certificates. For information about viewing and deleting certificates, see the sections below.

Personal1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Certificates icon - Personal tab.

Figure 3-28. Certificates Window - Personal Tab

3-34


The list box displays the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date.

2. To view more information about a certificate, select it from the list box.3. To delete a certificate, tap and hold it in the list box and then tap Delete.4. Tap ok.

Root1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Certificates icon - Root tab.

Figure 3-29. Certificates Window - Root Tab

The list box displays the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date.

2. To view more information about a certificate, select it from the list box.3. To delete a certificate, tap and hold it in the list box and then tap Delete.4. Tap ok.

3-35


ClockUse the Clock window to change the date, time, time zone and set alarms.

TimeTo set the date, time and time zone:

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Clock icon - Time tab.

Figure 3-30. Clock Window - Time Tab

2. Select the Home radio button.3. Select the current time zone from the time zone drop-down list.4. To set the hour:

• Tap on the hour field and use the up and down arrows to the right of the time to adjust the hour.

or

• On the clock face, tap and drag the hour hand to the current hour.5. To set the minutes:

• tap on the minute field and use the up and down arrows to the right of the time to adjust the minutes

or

• On the clock face, tap and drag the minute hand to the current minutes.

3-36


6. To set the date, tap in the date field.7. Tap the down arrow to the right of the date field. The calendar appears.

Figure 3-31. Calendar

8. To select the month and year, tap the arrows to the right or left of the month until the current month displays.

9. Tap the day of the month. The calendar disappears.10. Tap ok.

If you visit a particular time zone often, set it as a Visiting time zone to quickly view the date and time for that zone.

A clock displays on the Navigation bar. To view the current date and time, tap the Time icon to see today's date.

Figure 3-32. Time and Next Appointment Message

To switch from analog to digital clock display, tap and hold the Time icon. Select Analog or Digital.

3-37


AlarmsTo use the terminal as a travel alarm clock, set a wake-up alarm.

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Clock icon - Alarms tab.

Figure 3-33. Clock Window - Alarms Tab

2. In the Description field, enter a name for the alarm.3. Tap the letter(s) representing the day(s) of the week to enable the alarm.4. Tap the bell icon to set alarm features. The alarm settings window appears.

Figure 3-34. Alarm Settings Window

3-38


5. Select the Play sound check box to enable a sound when the alarm starts.6. From the drop-down list, select the sound that plays when the alarm goes off.7. Select Repeat sound check box to repeat the sound notification.8. Select Display message check box to enable a message to appear on the screen

when the alarm goes off.9. Tap ok.10. Tap the time field to set the alarm time. The clock window appears.

Figure 3-35. Alarm Clock Setting Window

11. Use the time field and arrow buttons to set the time.12. Tap ok.13. Set up to three more alarms.14. Tap ok.15. To change the way the date or time is displayed on the terminal, see Regional

Settings on page 3-45.

3-39


MemoryUse the Memory window to adjust RAM allocation, view storage card memory use and stop active programs.

MainTo temporarily adjust the allocation of storage and program memory:

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Memory icon - Main tab.

Figure 3-36. Memory Window - Main Tab

2. To adjust RAM allocation move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage. If more file storage space is required, increase the amount of storage memory. If the terminal is running slowly, increase the amount of program memory.

3. Tap ok.

Note: Reset the terminal to make additional storage or program memory available if memory problems continue. Programs supplied with the terminal are located in ROM and remain after a cold boot. Programs you install are located in RAM and must be reinstalled after a cold boot. If there are problems reinstalling programs, adjust RAM allocation.

3-40


Storage CardThe Storage Card tab displays how much memory is available in a partition in the terminal.

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Memory icon - Storage Card tab.

Figure 3-37. Memory Window - Storage Card Tab

2. Tap the name of the storage card or Flash File partition in the drop-down menu to view its information. Minimally, the drop-down list includes the Platform and Application partition.

3. Tap ok.

3-41


Running ProgramsThe Running Programs tab displays the list of currently active programs.

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Memory icon - Running Programs tab.

Figure 3-38. Memory Window - Running Programs Tab

The Running Program List: lists all running (active) programs.

2. To stop an active program, select the program from the Running Program List: and tap Stop.

3. To display an active program, select the program from the Running Program List: and tap Activate.

4. To stop all active programs tap Stop All.5. Tap ok.

3-42


PowerUse the Power window to view the status of the main and backup batteries and set power management options.

BatteryTo check the main battery and backup battery status:

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Power icon.

Figure 3-39. Power Window

The Power window provides general information about battery conditions. The amount of useful operating time remaining varies depending on battery type and terminal use. Options are also provided for turning off the terminal to conserve battery power. To conserve the most power, select the option to turn off the terminal after 3 minutes or less.

2. Select On battery power: Turn off device if not used for check box.3. Select a time value from the drop-down list.4. Select On external power: Turn off device if not used for check box.5. Select a time value from the drop-down list.6. Tap ok.

3-43


Optimizing Battery LifeUnder normal conditions, a single charge provides many hours of use. To optimize the battery life:

• Use external power whenever possible, especially when:• Using the backlight• Connecting to a desktop computer• Using accessories.

• Set the terminal to turn off when idle. While on battery power, the terminal automatically turns off, or suspends operation, if keyboard or the stylus is not used for three minutes. Maximize battery life by shortening this time.

• Turn off unused sounds. By default, the terminal produces sounds in response to a number of events, such as warnings, appointments and key presses. To optimize battery life, turn off any unused sounds. See Sounds & Notifications on page 3-24 for instructions.

Note: When batteries are low, a battery icon appears in the Navigation bar. See Table 2-2 on page 2-7 for more information.

3-44


Regional SettingsUse regional settings to change the way the terminal displays dates, times, currency amounts, large numbers and numbers with decimal fractions. Metric or U.S. system of measurement is also selectable.

When switching to another input locale, some programs offer special features, such as font characters or spell checkers designed for different languages.

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Regional Settings icon - Region tab.

Figure 3-40. Regional Settings Window - Region Tab

2. From the drop-down list, select the country.

3-45


3. Select the Number tab.

Figure 3-41. Regional Settings Window - Number Tab

4. Select the desired options. The characteristics available depend on the region selected on the Region tab.

5. Select the Currency tab.

Figure 3-42. Regional Settings Window - Currency Tab

6. Select the desired options. The characteristics available depend on the region selected on the Regional tab.

3-46


7. Select the Time tab.

Figure 3-43. Regional Settings Window - Time Tab


9. Select the Date tab.

Figure 3-44. Regional Settings Window - Date Tab


11. Tap ok.

3-47


Remove ProgramsUse the Remove Programs window to remove programs that were loaded onto the terminal:

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Remove Programs icon.

Figure 3-45. Remove Programs Window

2. From the Programs in storage memory: list box, select the program to remove.3. Tap Remove.4. Tap ok.

Note: Only remove programs installed in RAM can be removed.

3-48


ScreenUse the Screen window to align the screen and to enable ClearType fonts.

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Screen icon.

Figure 3-46. Screen Window

2. Tap Align Screen.3. Tap each target with the stylus and following the on-screen messages.

4. Select the Enable ClearType check box to enable easier reading of text in programs that support ClearType.

5. Tap ok.

3-49


Symbol SettingsUse the Symbol Settings window to set specific settings for the terminal.

WakeupsThe terminal can be configured to wake up by pressing the Trigger key or any button on the terminal. To set up this configuration:

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Symbol Settings - Wakeup tab.

Figure 3-47. Symbol Setting Window - Wakeups Tab

2. Configure the wake-up source for the terminal.a. Under Power Off select the items to configure wake-ups when the terminal is

powered off.b. Under Auto Off select the items to configure wake-ups when the terminal enters

suspension mode after a set period of time (set this time in Start - Settings - System tab - Power).

Note: The Power button is the only wake-up source for the terminal after the battery door is reinstalled, after a battery fault condition or when the terminal suspends due to a very low battery. Press the Power button to resume the terminal and use all selected wake-up sources as configured.

3-50


SettingsUse this window to configure the terminal’s backlight and external power supply:

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Symbol Settings - Settings tab.

Figure 3-48. Symbol Setting Window - Settings Tab

2. Select the checkbox to invert the display when the backlight is on.3. Select an item from the External 5 Volt Power drop-down menu to specify whether

the 5V pin on COM1 is never powered (Off), always powered (Always On), or is powered only when the terminal is active (Active On). Note that when the terminal suspends, the 5V power is removed from the pin.

3-51


System and ConfigurationThe System and Configuration tabs display terminal system and configuration information.

1. Tap Start - Settings - System tab - Symbol Settings, then the System tab or Config tab.

Figure 3-49. Symbol Setting Window - System and Config Tabs

2. View information for the terminal system and configuration on these tabs.

3-52

Chapter 4 Communications

Chapter ContentsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Installing ActiveSync Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Setting up a Partnership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Performing an ActiveSync for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Performing ActiveSync using the Synchronization Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Performing ActiveSync using the Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Performing Subsequent ActiveSync Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Performing a Remote ActiveSync. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Serial Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Setting Up a Connection on the PPT 2800. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Setting Up a Connection on the Desktop Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Installing eConnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

4-1


4-2

Communications

IntroductionThe terminal uses ActiveSync to synchronize its information with information on the desktop computer. The PPT 2846 can also connect to the Internet across a wireless network using the Mobile Companion application.

Installing ActiveSync SoftwareUse ActiveSync (version 3.7 or higher) to synchronize the information on the terminal with the information on the desktop computer. Changes made on the terminal or desktop computer appear in both places after synchronization.

Use ActiveSync software to:

• Work with terminal-compatible host applications on the desktop computer. ActiveSync replicates data from the terminal so data can be viewed, entered and modified on the terminal with the host application.

• Synchronize files between the terminal and desktop computer. The files are automatically converted to the correct format.

• Back up the data stored on the terminal. Synchronization is a one-step procedure that ensures the data is always safe and up-to-date.

• Copy (rather than synchronize) files between the terminal and desktop computer.• Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode, e.g.,

set to synchronize continually while the terminal is connected to the desktop computer, or set to only synchronize on command.

• Select the types of information to synchronize and control how much data is synchronized.

To install ActiveSync on the desktop computer:

1. Download the latest version of the software from the Microsoft web site athttp://www.microsoft.com. Refer to the installation and RAS instructions included with the ActiveSync software.

2. Set up a partnership via the ActiveSync connection using a serial connection to the desktop computer.

Note: Microsoft recommends installing ActiveSync on the desktop computer before connecting the terminal.

4-3

http://www.microsoft.com


Setting up a PartnershipAfter ActiveSync installation is complete, the ActiveSync Setup Wizard helps connect the terminal to the desktop computer, set up a partnership to synchronize information between the terminal and desktop computer and customize synchronization settings.

Before setting up a partnership between the terminal and desktop computer, refer to the communication setup sections in this chapter for detailed information about serial and Ethernet communication setups.

To set up a partnership:

1. If the Get Connected window does not appear on the desktop computer, select Start - Programs - Microsoft ActiveSync - File - Get Connected.

Figure 4-1. Get Connected Window

2. Connect the terminal to the desktop computer using the appropriate serial connection (see Performing an ActiveSync for the First Time on page 4-8).

3. On the desktop computer, select Next in the Get Connected window.

4-4

Communications

4. The desktop computer and the terminal attempt to synchronize. The New Partnership window appears.

Figure 4-2. New Partnership Window

5. Click the Standard partnership radio button and then select Next. The New Partnership/Specify how to synchronize data window appears.

Figure 4-3. How To Sync Window

4-5


6. Click the Synchronize with this desktop computer radio button and select Next. The New Partnership/Select Number of Partnerships window appears.

Figure 4-4. How To Sync Window

7. Click the Yes, I want to synchronize with only this computer radio button and then select Next. The New Partnership/Select Synchronization Settings window appears.

Figure 4-5. Select Synchronization Settings Window

8. To synchronize a particular type of information, select its check box. To stop synchronization of that information, clear its check box.

4-6

Communications

9. Select Next. The New Partnership/Setup Complete window appears.

Figure 4-6. Setup Complete Window

10. Select Finish. The Microsoft ActiveSync window appears showing the connection status and the data synchronized.

Figure 4-7. ActiveSync Connected Window

During the first synchronization, information stored on the desktop computer is copied to the terminal. When synchronization completes, you can disconnect the terminal from the desktop computer.

4-7


Note: The first ActiveSync operation must be performed with a local, direct connection.To retain partnerships after a cold boot, capture partnership registry information in a .reg file and save it in the Flash File System. See the Windows CE Help File for Symbol Terminals for details.

For more information about using ActiveSync, start ActiveSync on the desktop computer and see ActiveSync Help.

Performing an ActiveSync for the First Time

Performing ActiveSync using the Synchronization CableTo perform an ActiveSync operation for the first time using the synchronization cable:

1. After installing the ActiveSync software, restart the desktop computer.2. Insert the cable into the bottom of the terminal.

Figure 4-8. Inserting the Cable in the Terminal

Synchronization Cable

4-8

Communications

3. Connect the other end of the cable to the serial communications port on the desktop computer.

Figure 4-9. Connecting the Synchronization Cable to the Computer

Note: The synchronization cable requires a dedicated port. It cannot share a port with an internal modem or other device. Refer to the computer user’s manual for the location of the serial port on the computer.

4. On the desktop computer, enter a name for the PPT 2800 terminal and click the Next button. Follow the instructions on the screen to set up a partnership that allows synchronization of information between the two devices. Items to be synchronized can be customized. Choose to synchronize continuously as information changes, upon connection, or manually by clicking the Sync button on the toolbar of the desktop computer.

Note: Assign each PPT 2800 terminal a unique name. Never try to synchronize more than one terminal to the same user name.

Performing ActiveSync using the CradleThe CRD 2700 Cradle is an essential data communications device, enabling synchronization of information between the PPT 2800 terminal and the desktop computer using ActiveSync® software. With customized or third party software, it also synchronizes the PPT 2800 terminal with corporate databases and other desktop computers.

Serial Port

4-9


To perform an ActiveSync operation for the first time using the cradle:

1. After installing the ActiveSync software, restart the desktop computer.2. Connect the CRD 2700 cradle to the computer by plugging the cable from the

cradle into the serial communications port on the desktop computer.

Figure 4-10. Connecting the Cradle to the Computer

Note: The CRD 2700 cable requires a dedicated port. It cannot share a port with an internal modem or other device. Refer to the computer user’s manual for the location of the serial port on the computer.

Serial Port

4-10

Communications

3. Turn on the PPT 2800 terminal and slide it into the cradle.

Figure 4-11. Inserting the Terminal in the Cradle

The curved edge on the bottom of the PPT 2800 terminal should align smoothly with the cradle when it is inserted properly.

4. On the desktop computer, enter a name for the PPT 2800 terminal and click the Next button. Follow the instructions on the screen to set up a partnership that allows synchronization of information between the two computers. Items to be synchronized can be customized. Choose to synchronize continuously as information changes, upon connection, or manually by clicking the Sync button on the toolbar of the desktop computer.

Note: Assign each PPT 2800 terminal a unique name. Never try to synchronize more than one terminal to the same user name.

Performing Subsequent ActiveSync OperationsAfter completing the first ActiveSync operation, synchronization occurs automatically. Place the terminal in the connected cradle or connect the synchronization cable to start synchronization.

4-11


Performing a Remote ActiveSyncTo synchronize the PPT 2800 remotely using a modem, first see Connecting to an ISP or a Network on page 9-5 to set up the terminal for a modem ActiveSync.

Before leaving the desktop computer, prepare the computer for a remote ActiveSync:

1. Start ActiveSync on the desktop computer.2. On the File menu, select Connection Settings.3. Select Allow network (Ethernet) and Remote Access Service (RAS) server

connection with this desktop computer.4. Leave the computer on and logged on.

To remotely sync the PPT 2800 terminal with the desktop computer:

1. Insert the terminal in the modem cradle, or attach the snap-on modem. If using the cradle, set the Sync Select switch on the back of the cradle to the Modem position.

2. On the PPT 2800, select Start, ActiveSync. 3. Tap the sync icon.

Serial Communication Setup

Setting Up a Connection on the PPT 28001. Tap Start - ActiveSync to display the ActiveSync window.

Figure 4-12. ActiveSync Window

4-12

Communications

2. Tap Tools - Options on the ActiveSync window to display the PC Synchronization window - PC tab.

Figure 4-13. PC Synchronization Window - PC Tab

3. Tap Options to display the PC Synchronization Options window.

Figure 4-14. PC Synchronization Options Window

4. Select the Enable PC sync using this connection: check box.5. Select the connection (e.g., serial COM port) for synchronization from the drop-

down list. 6. Select the Maintain connection radio button.

4-13


7. Tap ok to exit the PC Synchronization Options window and tap ok to exit the PC Synchronization window.

8. Ensure that ActiveSync is installed on the desktop computer and a partnership was created. See Installing ActiveSync Software on page 4-3 and Setting up a Partnership on page 4-4.

Setting Up a Connection on the Desktop Computer1. Select Start - Programs - Microsoft ActiveSync on the desktop computer, if it is not

already running. The Microsoft ActiveSync window appears.

Figure 4-15. ActiveSync - Not Connected

Note: Assign each terminal a unique device name. Never try to synchronize more than one terminal to the same name.

4-14

Communications

2. In the ActiveSync window, select File - Connection Settings.

Figure 4-16. Connection Settings Window

3. In the Connection Settings window, select the appropriate check box for the type of connection being used. If using a serial connection, select the COM port from the drop-down list.

Note: If using serial and Ethernet connections, you can select all check boxes to avoid having to update this window for different connections. However, if the same serial COM port is used for ActiveSync and TCM, you must deselect the serial COM port in this window for it to be available for TCM downloads.

4. Select the Show status icon in taskbar check box.5. Tap ok to save any changes made.6. Insert the terminal in the cradle, or connect the terminal to the desktop computer

(see Performing an ActiveSync for the First Time on page 4-8 for connection instructions).

Note: The cradle requires a dedicated port. It cannot share a port with any other device.

4-15


7. Power on the terminal.8. If a partnership was already created between the desktop computer and terminal,

synchronization occurs automatically upon connection.

Installing eConnect

Note: eConnect is used only when establishing a connection using the Ethernet cradle.

To install eConnect on the terminal:

1. Ensure ActiveSync is installed and running on the desktop computer (see Installing ActiveSync Software on page 4-3). Ensure a partnership was established between the desktop computer and the terminal (see Setting up a Partnership on page 4-4).

2. Download the latest version of the eConnect software from http://devzone.symbol.com to the desktop computer.

3. On the desktop computer, display the ActiveSync Explorer and copy the .cab file to the My Pocket PC Temp folder.

4. On the terminal, locate the .cab file in the File Explorer Temp folder.5. Tap the eConnect .cab file once to install eConnect.6. The .cab file is removed from the File Explorer Temp folder automatically when the

installation is complete.7. Tap X to close File Explorer.8. Warm boot the terminal to add the eConnect icon to the Settings - System tab.

eConnect is reinstalled automatically after a cold boot.

4-16

http://devzone.symbol.com

Communications

9. On the terminal tap Start - Settings - System tab and tap the eConnect icon to display the Settings - eConnect window.

Figure 4-17. Settings Windows

10. Set the Serial Port Baud Rate: to the appropriate value using the drop-down menu.11. Tap ok to exit the Settings - eConnect window and tap X to exit the Settings

window.

Host Computer ConfigurationTo set up the desktop computer with the appropriate communication software and connection settings, follow the steps below using Microsoft ActiveSync software on both the terminal and the desktop computer.

To configure the desktop computer:

1. Download and install ActiveSync. See Installing ActiveSync Software on page 4-3.2. Configure the desktop computer for TCP/IP network communications.

a. Click the ActiveSync icon.b. Click on File - Connection settings.c. In the Connection settings window, select the Allow Network (Ethernet) and

Remote Access Service (RAS) server connection with this desktop computer option.Select other options if desired, for example, Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port.

3. Click ok.

4-17


Note: Before communicating through an Ethernet connection, create a partnership between the terminal and the desktop computer via a serial connection. See Setting up a Partnership on page 4-4 for detailed instructions.

DHCP Server ConfigurationTo use a DHCP server to distribute IP addresses and other network parameters, include the following in the server setup:

• IP address pool (1 or 5 IP address per cradle)• Router/gateway address• One or more DNS server addresses• One or more WINS server addresses• Subnet mask.

Note: To assign the initial cradle IP address, use a DHCP server.

4-18

Communications

Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless NetworkThe PPT 2846 can connect to the Internet across a wireless network. To set up a wireless connection:

1. Tap the Mobile Companion icon on the task tray. The Mobile Companion menu appears.

Figure 4-18. Mobile Companion Menu

2. Tap Find WLANs. The Mobile Companion window appears.

Figure 4-19. Mobile Companion Window

3. The terminal tries to locate Access Points (APs) in the area. When it locates a wireless LAN(s), the ESSID name displays in the Available WLAN Networks list.

4. Tap the ESSID name and then tap Connect.

Mobile Companion Icon

Mobile Companion Menu

4-19


5. The Mobile Companion Mode tab appears.

Figure 4-20. Mobile Companion - Mode Tab

6. The profile name and ESSID name appear in the respective fields.7. In the Operating Mode: list, select Infrastructure.8. Tap the Encryption tab.

Figure 4-21. Mobile Companion - Encryption Tab

9. Select the encryption algorithm used on the wireless network (Open System, 40-bit Shared Key, 128-bit Shared Key, Kerberos, or LEAP).If the 40-bit Shared Key, 128-bit Shared Key or Kerberos is selected, enter the required data in the fields that appear in the window. See the network administrator for this information.

4-20

Communications

10. Tap the IP Config tab.

Figure 4-22. Mobile Companion - IP Config Tab (DHCP)

11. Select either DHCP or Static from the IP Type drop-down list.12. If Static IP is selected, enter the required data in the fields that appear in the

window. See the network administrator for this information.13. Tap ok.14. Tap ok. The Mobile Companion wireless status icon indicates that the terminal is

connected to the AP. If not, see the network administrator.15. Tap Start - Settings - Connections tab - Connections icon - Advanced tab.

Figure 4-23. Connections Window - Advanced Tab

4-21


16. Tap Network Card. The Configure Network Adapters window appears.

Figure 4-24. Configure Network Adapters Window

17. Select The Internet from the My network card connects to: drop-down list.18. Select 802.11b Wireless LAN from the Tap an adapter to notify settings: list box.

The 802.11b Wireless LAN window appears.

Figure 4-25. 802.11b Wireless LAN Window

4-22

Communications

19. Tap ok. A notification window appears indicating that the next time the adapter (radio card) is used it will have the new settings.

Figure 4-26. Adapters Message Window

20. Tap ok.21. Tap ok.22. Tap ok.23. Tap Start - Programs - Internet Explorer. The Pocket Internet Explorer window

appears.

Figure 4-27. Pocket Internet Explorer Window

24. In the address bar, enter the URL for a web site.

4-23


4-24

Chapter 5 AirBEAM Smart

Chapter ContentsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3AirBEAM Package Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3AirBEAM Smart Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

AirBEAM License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Synchronizing with the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

AirBEAM Staging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

5-1


5-2

AirBEAM Smart

IntroductionThe AirBEAM Smart product allows specially designed software packages to be transferred between a host server and Symbol wireless handheld terminals. Before transfer, AirBEAM Smart checks and compares the package version, so that only updated packages are loaded.

AirBEAM Smart resides on radio-equipped client devices and allows them to request, download and install software, as well as upload files and status data. A single communications session both downloads and uploads files. Transferring software over a radio network can greatly reduce the logistical efforts of client software management.

In an AirBEAM Smart system, a network-accessible host server acts as the storage point for the software transfer. The AirBEAM Smart Client uses the industry standard FTP or TFTP file transfer protocols to check the host system for updates and, if necessary, to transfer updated software.

Note: For more information about AirBEAM Smart, refer to the AirBEAM® Smart Windows® CE Client Product Reference Guide (p/n 72-63060-xx).

AirBEAM Package BuilderIn a typical distributed AirBEAM system, software to be transferred is organized into packages. In general, an AirBEAM package is simply a set of files assigned attributes both as an entire package and as individual component files. The package is assigned a version number and the transfer occurs when an updated version is available.

An AirBEAM package can optionally contain developer-specified logic used to install the package. Installation logic is typically used to update client device flash images or radio firmware. Examples of common AirBEAM packages include packages for custom client application software, radio firmware and AirBEAM Smart Client software.

Once these packages are built, they are installed on the host server for retrieval by the handheld terminal. The AirBEAM Package Builder utility defines, generates and installs AirBEAM packages to a server. The packages are then loaded from the server onto a client device equipped with an AirBEAM Smart Client executable.

5-3


For detailed instructions on how to define, generate and install AirBEAM packages to the server, refer to the AirBEAM Package Builder Product Reference Guide, p/n 72-55769-xx.

AirBEAM Smart ClientThe AirBEAM Smart Client installed on the handheld terminal is configured with the server access information, the names of the packages to be downloaded and other controlling parameters. When the AirBEAM Smart Client is launched, the device connects to the specified FTP server and checks the packages it is configured to look for. If the package version was updated, the client requests the transfer.

AirBEAM LicenseThe AirBEAM Smart Client is a licensed software product. A license key file stored on the client device enables the AirBEAM Smart Client's version synchronization functionality. The license key file can be built into AirBEAM Smart Client's image, or downloaded in a special AirBEAM package.

The AirBEAM license key file contains a unique key and a customer-specific banner that appears when invoking the AirBEAM Smart Client version synchronization logic.

Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client1. Tap Start - Programs - AirBEAM Smart Client. The AirBEAM Smart CE window

appears.2. Tap File - Configure. The AirBEAM configuration window appears.

Figure 5-1. AirBEAM Configuration Window

5-4

AirBEAM Smart

Use the configuration window to view and edit AirBEAM Smart Client configurations. This window has six tabs that can be modified - Packages(1), Packages(2), Server, Misc(1), Misc(2) and Misc(3).

Packages(1) TabUse this tab to specify the package name of the first four of eight packages that are to be loaded during the AirBEAM synchronization process. The specified package name must correspond to a package available on the specified package server.

Packages(2) TabUse this tab to specify the package name of the last four of eight packages to be loaded during the AirBEAM synchronization process. The specified package name must correspond to a package available on the specified package server.

Field Description

Package 1 Package name of the first of eight packages. This is an optional field.

Package 2 Package name of the second of eight packages. This is an optional field.

Package 3 Package name of the third of eight packages. This is an optional field.

Package 4 Package name of the fourth of eight packages. This is an optional field.

Field Description

Package 5 Package name of the fifth of eight packages. This is an optional field.

Package 6 Package name of the sixth of eight packages. This is an optional field.

Package 7 Package name of the seventh of eight packages. This is an optional field.

Package 8 Package name of the eighth of eight packages. This is an optional field.

Upload Pkg Package name of a package to be processed for “upload files” during the AirBEAM synchronization process. The specified package name must correspond to a package available on the specified package server. This is an optional field.

5-5


Server TabUse this tab to specify the configurations of the server to which the client connects during the package synchronization process.

Misc(1) TabUse this tab to configure various miscellaneous features.

Field Description

IP Address The IP Address of the server. It can be a host name or a dot notation format.

Directory The directory on the server that contains the AirBEAM package definition files. All AirBEAM package definition files are retrieved from this directory during package synchronization.

User The FTP user name used during the login phase of the package synchronization process.

Password The FTP password that corresponds to the FTP user specified in the User field. The specified password is used during the login phase of the package synchronization process.

5-6

AirBEAM Smart

Field Description

Auto-load Use this drop-down list to specify how to automatically invoke the AirBEAM Smart Client when the client device is rebooted. Options are:

Disable: the AirBEAM Smart Client is not invoked automatically during the boot sequence.Interactive: the boot sequence automatically invokes the AirBEAM Smart Client and starts the package synchronization process. The Synchronization window appears. Press the ok button when the process is complete.Non-interactive: the boot sequence automatically invokes the AirBEAM Smart Client and starts the package synchronization process. The Synchronization window appears, but you don’t have to tap ok when the process is complete. The Synchronization window terminates automatically.Background: the boot sequence automatically invokes the AirBEAM Smart Client and starts the package synchronization process. Nothing is displayed during synchronization.

RAM Management

Use this check box to specify whether to enable the automatic RAM management during package synchronization. If enabled, RAM management logic is invoked when there is not enough free disk space to download a package. The RAM management logic attempts to remove any discardable AirBEAM packages resident on the client.

Suppress Separator

Use this check box to specify whether to suppress the automatic insertion of a file path separator character in client-generated server package definition file names.When enabled, the parameter also suppresses the appending of .apd to the package. This feature is useful for AS/400 systems, in which the file path separator character is a period. When this feature is enabled, the server directory (Directory) and package name (Package 1, Package 2, Package 3 and Package 4) are appended “as is” when building the name for the server package definition file. When this feature is disabled, a standard file path separator is used to separate the server directory (Directory) and package name (Package 1, Package 2, Package 3 and Package 4) when building the name for the server package definition file. An .apd extension is also appended.

TFTP Use this check box to specify whether to use the TFTP protocol to download files. By default, the AirBEAM Smart Client uses the FTP protocol.

WNMS Use this check box to specify whether the AirBEAM Smart Client uploads a WNMS information file at the end of each version synchronization.

5-7



Field Description

Auto-retry Use this field to specify whether the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries if there is a failure during synchronization. If this feature is enabled, the AirBEAM Smart Client displays a popup window indicating the attempt of a retry. The popup window is displayed for the number of seconds specified in the Retry Delay field. Valid values for this field are:

-1: the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries indefinitely.0: the AirBEAM Smart Client does not automatically retry.

-0: the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries up to the number of times specified.

Retry Delay This field specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the AirBEAM Smart Client delays before automatically retrying after a synchronization failure.

In-use Test This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client tests to determine if a file is in use before downloading. If the In-use Test feature is enabled, the AirBEAM Smart Client downloads a temporary copy of any files that are in use. If any temporary in-use files are downloaded the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically resets the client to complete the copy of the in-use files. If the In-use Test feature is disabled, synchronization fails (-813) if any download files are in use.

Wait Welcome This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client waits for the WELCOME windows to be completed before automatically launching the synchronization process after a reset.

Close Apps This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically attempts to close non-system applications prior to resetting the terminal. If enabled the AirBEAM Smart Client sends a WM_CLOSE message to all non-system applications before resetting the terminal. This feature offers applications the opportunity to prepare (i.e., close open files) for the pending reset.

5-8

AirBEAM Smart


Synchronizing with the ServerUpon synchronization, the AirBEAM Smart Client attempts to open an FTP session using the AirBEAM Smart Client configuration. Once connected, the client processes the specified packages. Packages are loaded only if the server version of a given package is different from the version loaded on the client. When the upload process completes, the AirBEAM Smart Client closes the FTP session with the server.

The AirBEAM Smart Client can launch an FTP session with the server either manually, when initiated by the user, or automatically.

Manual Synchronization1. Configure the AirBEAM Smart Client. See Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client

on page 5-4.2. From the main AirBEAM CE window, tap File - Synchronize.

Field Description

Use DHCP server

This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client uses the DHCP response option 66 to specify the IP address of the FTP/TFTP server.If enabled, special RF network registry settings are required to force the DHCP server to return the "TFTP server name" field (option 66). The special RF network registry settings are included, but commented out, in the radio network registry initialization files (essid_xxxx_yy.reg).

Use DHCP bootfile

This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client uses the DHCP response option 67 to specify the Package and Package 1 parameters.If enabled, special RF network registry settings are required to force the DHCP server to return the "Bootfile name" field (option 67). The special RF network registry settings are included, but commented out, in the radio network registry initialization files (essid_xxxx_yy.reg).

5-9


3. Once connected, the AirBEAM Synchronize window appears.• The Status List displays status messages that indicate the

progress of the synchronization process.• Tap ok to return to the Main Menu. This button remains

inactive until the synchronization process is complete.• Tap Retry to restart the synchronization process if an

error occurs during synchronization.

Automatic SynchronizationYou can configure the AirBEAM Smart Client to launch automatically using the Misc(1) Preference tab (see Misc(1) Tab on page 5-6). When setting automatic synchronization, use the Auto-load drop-down list to specify how to automatically invoke the AirBEAM Smart Client when the client device is rebooted. Refer to Misc(1) Tab on page 5-6 for instructions on enabling Auto Sync.

5-10

AirBEAM Smart

AirBEAM StagingThe AirBEAM Smart staging support is intended to speed up and simplify the process of staging custom or updated operating software onto mobile devices directly from manufacturing. The staging support is part of the AirBEAM Smart CE Client integrated in the terminal, and is beneficial in that many devices can be simultaneously loaded over the RF network. The utility provides a simple dialog user interface used to quickly start the software installation process.

The AirBEAM Smart support defaults the AirBEAM Client configuration to a known set of values and launches the AirBEAM Smart package download logic. First, set up a staging environment, including an RF network, FTP server and AirBEAM packages. Ideally, set up the staging network and server to match the default AirBEAM Staging client configuration.

To invoke the AirBEAM Smart staging utility, tap Start - Programs - File Explorer - Application.

5-11


5-12

Chapter 6 Applications

Chapter ContentsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Creating Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Using the Summary Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Creating Meeting Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Using the Summary Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Using the Summary Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Synchronizing E-mail Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Using the Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16Creating E-mail Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Managing E-mail Messages and Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

6-1


6-2

Applications

Introduction

The terminal includes Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, Inbox, and Notes applications. Use these programs individually or together. For example, use e-mail addresses stored in Contacts to address e-mail messages in Inbox.

Use ActiveSync to synchronize information in these applications between the desktop computer and the terminal. Upon synchronization, ActiveSync compares the changes made on the terminal and desktop computer and updates both with the latest information. For information on using ActiveSync, see Chapter 4, Communications, and ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer.

To switch to any of these programs, tap it on the Start menu.

CalendarUse Calendar to schedule appointments such as meetings. View appointments in different ways (Agenda, Day, Week, Month, and Year), and change views using the View menu.

Figure 6-1. Calendar Application

Tap to go to today.

Tap to display or edit the appointment details.

Tap to create a new appointment.

6-3


Note: To customize the Calendar display, such as changing the first day of the week, tap Tools - Options.

Creating AppointmentsTo create an appointment:

1. To select Calendar, press the App1 button or tap Start - Calendar.2. From the Day or Week view, tap the desired date and time for the appointment.3. Tap New.

Figure 6-2. Entering an Appointment

4. Using the input panel, enter the subject and a location. Tap first to select the field. 5. If needed, tap the date and time to change them.6. Enter other desired information. Hide the input panel to see all available fields.7. To add notes, tap the Notes tab, and enter text, draw, or create a recording. For

more information on creating notes, see Notes on page 6-12.8. When finished, tap OK to return to the calendar.

Tap to return to the calendar (the appointment is saved automatically).

Tap to choose from predefined text.Tap to choose from previously entered locations.

Tap to select a time.

Tap to select a date.

Notes is a good place for maps and directions.

6-4

Applications

Note: If you select Remind me in an appointment, the terminal provides a reminder according to the options set in Start - Settings - Personal tab - Sounds & Notifications.

Using the Summary WindowTap an appointment in Calendar to view a summary window. Tap Edit to change the appointment.

Figure 6-3. Appointment Summary Window

Creating Meeting RequestsUse Calendar to set up meetings with users of Outlook or Pocket Outlook. The meeting notice is created automatically and sent either when synchronizing the Inbox or when connecting to the e-mail server. To indicate how to send meeting requests, tap Tools - Options. If you send and receive e-mail messages through ActiveSync, select ActiveSync.

To schedule a meeting:

1. Create an appointment.2. In the appointment details, hide the input panel, then tap Attendees.3. From the list of e-mail addresses in Contacts, select the meeting attendees.

View appointment details.

View notes.

Tap to change appointment.

6-5


The meeting notice is created and placed in the Outbox folder. For more information on sending and receiving meeting requests, see Calendar Help and Inbox Help on the terminal.

ContactsContacts maintains a list of associates and friends so you can easily locate information at home or on the road. Use the infrared (IR) port to share Contacts information with other terminal users.

Figure 6-4. Contact Application

Note: To change the way information is listed, tap Tools - Options.

To create a contact:

1. Tap Start - Contacts to open the application.

Select the category of contacts displayed in the list.

Tap and enter part of a name to quickly find it in the list.Tap to see additional phone numbers and e-mail addresses.Tap to display or edit the contact details.

Tap and hold to display a pop-up menu of actions.

Tap to create a new contact.

6-6

Applications

2. Tap New.

Figure 6-5. Creating a Contact

3. Using the input panel, enter a name and other contact information. Scroll down to see all fields.

4. To assign the contact to a category, scroll to and tap Categories. Select a category from the list. In the contact list, display contacts by category.

5. To add notes, tap the Notes tab and enter text, draw, or create a recording. For more information on creating notes, see Notes on page 6-12.

6. When finished, tap OK to return to the contact list.To find a contact:

• In the contact list, enter a contact name in the box under the navigation bar. To show all contacts again, clear text from the box or tap the button to the right of the box.

• In the contact list, tap the category list (labeled All Contacts by default) and select the type of contact to display. To show all contacts again, select All Contacts. To view a contact not assigned to a category, select None.

• To view the names of companies that contacts work for, in the contact list, tap View - By Company. The number of contacts that work for that company appears to the right of the company name.

• Tap Start, Find, enter the contact name, select Contacts for the type, then tap Go.


Scroll to see more fields.

Tap to return to the contact list (the contact is saved automatically).

6-7


Using the Summary WindowTap a contact in the contact list to view a summary window. Tap Edit to change the information.

Figure 6-6. Contacts Summary Window

View contact details.

Tap to view notes.

Tap to change contact information.

6-8

Applications

TasksUse Tasks to keep a “to do” list.

Figure 6-7. Task Application

Note: To change the way information displays in the list, tap Tools - Options.

To create a task:

1. Tap Start - Tasks to open the application.

Select the category of tasks displayed in the list.

Tap to display or edit the task details.

Select the sort order of the list.Indicates high priority.



6-9


2. Tap New.

Figure 6-8. Creating a Task

3. Using the input panel, enter a description in the Subject field.4. Enter a start date and due date or enter information by first tapping the field. If the

input panel is open, hide it to see all available fields.5. To assign the task to a category, tap Categories and select a category from the list.

In the task list, display tasks by category.6. To add notes, tap the Notes tab, and enter text, draw, or create a recording. For

more information on creating notes, see Notes on page 6-12.7. Tap OK to return to the task list.

Note: To create a task with only a subject, tap Tools - Entry Bar. Then tap Tap here to add a new task and enter task information.


Tap to choose from predefined subjects.

Tap to return to the task list (the task is saved automatically).

6-10

Applications

Using the Summary WindowTap a task in the task list to view a summary window. To change the task, tap Edit.

Figure 6-9. Task Summary Window

View task details.

View notes.

Tap to change task.

Tap to show and hide additional summary information.

6-11


NotesCapture thoughts, reminders, ideas, drawings and phone numbers with Notes. Entries can include text, drawing, or a recording. If a note is open when you create the recording, it is included in the note as an icon. If the note list is displayed, it is created as a stand-alone recording.

Figure 6-10. Notes Application

Tap to open a note or play a recording.

Tap to change the sort order of the list.



Tap to show or hide the Recording toolbar.

Tap to record.

6-12

Applications

To create a note:

1. Tap Start - Notes to open the application.2. Tap New.3. Create a note by writing, drawing, typing, and recording. For more information

about using the input panel, writing and drawing on the screen, and creating recordings, see Chapter 2, Operating the PPT 2800.

Figure 6-11. Creating a Note

Tap to return to the task list (the task is saved automatically).

Tap to show or hide the input panel.

Tap to write on the screen.

Tap to add a recording to the note.

6-13


InboxUse Inbox to send and receive e-mail messages in the following ways:

• Synchronize e-mail messages with Microsoft Exchange or Outlook on the desktop computer.

• Send and receive e-mail messages by connecting directly to an e-mail server through an Internet service provider (ISP) or a network.

Synchronizing E-mail MessagesTo synchronize e-mail messages, first enable Inbox synchronization in ActiveSync options. For information on enabling Inbox synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer.

During synchronization:

• E-mail messages are copied from the Inbox folder of Exchange or Outlook on the desktop computer to the ActiveSync folder on the terminal. By default, you receive messages from the last 3 days only, the first 100 lines of each message, and file attachments of less than 100 KB in size.

• E-mail messages in the Outbox folder on the terminal are transferred to Exchange or Outlook, then sent from those programs.

• E-mail messages in subfolders must be selected in ActiveSync on the desktop computer to be transferred.

Note: To synchronize e-mail messages with the desktop computer from a remote location, see Chapter 9, Connections.

Connecting Directly to an E-mail ServerTo send and receive e-mail messages by connecting to an e-mail server using a modem or network card connected to the terminal, first set up a remote connection to a network or an ISP, and a connection to the e-mail server. For more information, see Chapter 9, Connections.

When connecting to the e-mail server, new messages are downloaded to the terminal Inbox folder, messages in the terminal Outbox folder are sent, and messages that were deleted on the e-mail server are removed from the terminal Inbox.

6-14

Applications

Messages received directly from an e-mail server are linked to the e-mail server rather than the desktop computer. When a message is deleted on the terminal, it's also deleted from the e-mail server on the next connect.

Work online or offline. When working online, you read and respond to messages while connected to the e-mail server. Messages are sent as soon as you tap Send, which saves space on the terminal.

When working offline, after downloading new message headers or partial messages, disconnect from the e-mail server, then decide which messages to download completely. The next time you connect, Inbox downloads the complete messages marked for retrieval and sends the messages created.

Multiple e-mail services can be used to receive messages. For each e-mail service, first set up and name the e-mail service. If the same e-mail service is used to connect to different mailboxes, set up and name each mailbox connection.

Setting Up an E-mail ServiceIn Inbox on the terminal, tap Accounts - New Account. Follow the instructions in the wizard on the screen. For an explanation of a screen, tap Start - Help.

When finished, tap Accounts - Connect to connect to the e-mail server. For more information on using the Inbox program, see Inbox on page 6-14.

6-15


Using the Message ListReceived messages display in the message list box. By default, the most recently received messages are listed first.

Figure 6-12. Inbox Application

Tap to open a message.

Select the sort order for messages.


Select the service and folder to display.

Tap to connect and to send and receive e-mail.

Tap to connect to the selected service.

6-16

Applications

Tap a received message in the list to open it. Unread messages appear in bold.

Figure 6-13. Viewing a Message

When connecting to the e-mail server or synchronizing with the desktop computer, Inbox downloads by default only messages from the last three days, the first 100 lines of each new message and file attachments of less than 100 KB in size. The original messages remain on the e-mail server or the desktop computer.

To mark the e-mail server messages to retrieve on the next synchronization or connection, tap and hold the message. On the pop-up menu, tap Mark for Download. The icons in the Inbox message list indicate message status.

Specify downloading preferences when setting up the service or when selecting synchronization options. Change preferences at any time:

• Change options for Inbox synchronization using ActiveSync options. For more information, see ActiveSync Help.

• Change options for direct e-mail server connections in Inbox on the terminal. Tap Tools - Options - Accounts tab, then tap the account. Tap and hold the account and select Delete to remove it.

Tap to return to the message list.

Tap to delete this message.

Tap to view the previous or next message.

Tap to reply to or forward this message.

6-17


Creating E-mail MessagesTo create an e-mail message:

1. Tap New. 2. In the To field, enter an e-mail or SMS address of one or more recipients,

separating each with a semicolon, or select a name from the contact list by tapping the Address Book icon. All e-mail addresses entered in the e-mail fields in Contacts appear in the Address Book.

Figure 6-14. Creating a Message

3. Enter the message. To enter preset or frequently used messages, tap My Text and select a message.

4. Tap Send when finished. If working offline, the message is transferred to the Outbox folder and sent on the next synchronization.

When sending an SMS message tap Edit - Options and select the Request SMS text message delivery notification check box before sending the message to confirm that it was received.

Tap to show/hide the recording tool.

Tap to display the Address Book.

Tap to insert common messages.

Tap to send the message.

Tap to show or hide the complete header.

6-18

Applications

Managing E-mail Messages and FoldersBy default, messages are displayed in one of five folders for each account: Inbox, Deleted Items, Drafts, Outbox and Sent Items. The Deleted Items folder contains messages that were deleted on the terminal. The behavior of the Deleted and Sent Items folders depends on the options selected. In the message list, tap Tools - Options. On the Message tab, select the options.

To organize messages into additional folders, tap Tools - Manage Folders to create new folders. To move a message to another folder, in the message list, tap and hold the message, then tap Move to on the pop-up menu.

Folder Behavior with ActiveSync and Direct Connection to ServerThe behavior of the folders depends on the ActiveSync, SMS, POP3, or IMAP4 services.

• When using ActiveSync, e-mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are automatically synchronized with the terminal. Select additional folders to synchronize by designating them for ActiveSync. The folders and the moved messages are mirrored on the server. For example, if two messages are moved from the Inbox folder to a folder named Family, and Family is designated for synchronization, the server creates a copy of the Family folder and copies the messages into that folder. The messages can then be read while away from the desktop computer.

• When using SMS, messages are stored in the Inbox folder. • When using POP3 and moving e-mail messages to a folder, the link is broken

between the messages on the terminal and their copies on the mail server. On the next connection, the mail server notes the messages missing from the terminal Inbox and deletes them from the server. This prevents having duplicate copies of a message, but it also means that access is not available to messages moved to folders created from anywhere except the terminal.

• When using IMAP4, the created folders and the moved e-mail messages are mirrored on the server. Therefore, messages are available anytime the mail server is connected. This folder synchronization occurs whenever you connect to the mail server, create new folders, or rename/delete folders when connected.

6-19


6-20

Chapter 7 Companion Programs

Chapter ContentsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Pocket Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Typing Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Writing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Recording Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Pocket Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Tips for Working in Pocket Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

MSN® Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Setting Up an Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Working with Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Chatting with Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Windows Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

7-1


7-2

Companion Programs

Introduction

The PPT 2800 contains the companion programs Microsoft Pocket Word, Microsoft Pocket Excel, Microsoft Money, and MSN® Messenger. To select a companion program, tap Start - Programs, then the program name.

Note: Microsoft Reader is not included in this implementation of Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs.

Pocket WordPocket Word works with Microsoft Word on the desktop computer to access to copies of documents. Create new documents on the PPT 2800, or copy documents from the desktop computer to the terminal. Synchronize documents between the desktop computer and the PPT 2800 to maintain up-to-date information in both locations.

To create a new document in Pocket Word, such as a letter, meeting minutes, or a trip report, tap Start - Programs - Pocket Word - New icon. A blank document appears. Or, if you selected a template for new documents in the Options window, that template appears with appropriate formatting applied. when opening a second document, a prompt appears to save the first document. Document file formats include Word (.doc), Pocket Word (.psw), Rich Text Format (.rtf), and Plain Text (.txt).

7-3


Pocket Word contains a list of the files stored on the terminal. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, or send a file, tap and hold a file in the list. Then, select the appropriate action on the pop-up menu.

Figure 7-1. Using Pocket Word

Enter information in Pocket Word in one of four modes (writing, drawing, typing, and recording) displayed on the View menu. Tap the Show/Hide Toolbar icon on the command bar to show or hide each mode’s toolbar.

To change the zoom magnification, tap View - Zoom. Select the percentage. Select a higher percentage to enter text and a lower one to see more of the document.

When opening a Word document created on a desktop computer, tap View - Wrap to Window to see the entire document.

Typing ModeUse the input panel to enter typed text into a document. See Entering Information on page 2-16 for more information.

Select the type of displayed folder.

Tap to change the sort order of the list.

Tap to open a document.

Tap and hold an item to see a pop-up menu of actions.

Tap to create a new item.

7-4

Companion Programs

To format or edit text, select the text using the stylus instead of the mouse to drag across the text. To search a document for the text, tap Edit - Find/Replace.

Figure 7-2. Formatting Text

Tap and hold to see a pop-up menu of actions.

Tap to return to the document list (changes are saved automatically).

Tap to change formatting options.

Use buttons to format text.

Tap to show or hide the toolbar.

7-5


Writing ModeIn writing mode, use the stylus to write directly on the screen. Ruled lines are displayed as a guide, and the zoom magnification increases to ease writing. For more information, see Writing on the Screen on page 2-19.

Figure 7-3. Writing on the Screen in Pocket Word

If you cross three ruled lines in a single stylus stroke, the writing becomes a drawing which can be edited and manipulated as described in the following section.

Written words are converted to graphics (metafiles) when a Pocket Word document is converted to a Word document on the desktop computer.

Drawing ModeIn drawing mode, use the stylus to draw on the screen. Gridlines appear as a guide. When you lift the stylus after the first stroke, a drawing box indicates the boundaries of the

With Space button selected, drag to insert space. An arrow appears showing the space direction and size.

Tap to highlight selected text.

Pen button.

Space button.

Tap to select formatting options, such as pen weight and line color.

7-6

Companion Programs

drawing. Every subsequent stroke within or touching the drawing box becomes part of the drawing. For more information, see Drawing on the Screen on page 2-22.

Figure 7-4. Drawing on the Screen in Pocket Word

Recording ModeUse recording mode to embed a recording into the document. Recordings are saved as .wav files. For more information, see Recording a Message on page 2-23.

For more information on using Pocket Word, tap Start - Help.

Select Shape on the pop-up menu to convert objects to proper shapes.

Resize an object by dragging the selection handles.

Tap to select formatting options, such as line weight, fill color and line color.

Tap an arrow to see choices.

Pen button.

7-7


Pocket ExcelPocket Excel works with Microsoft Excel on the desktop computer to provide easy access to copies of workbooks. Create new workbooks on the PPT 2800, or copy workbooks from the desktop computer to the PPT 2800. Synchronize workbooks between the desktop computer and the PPT 2800 to maintain up-to-date content in both locations.

To create a new workbook in Pocket Excel, such as an expense report or mileage log, tap Start - Programs - Pocket Excel - New. A blank workbook appears. Or, if you selected a template for new workbooks in the Options window, that template appears with appropriate text and formatting already provided. When opening a second workbook, a prompt appears to save the first. Workbook file formats include Pocket Excel (.pxl) and Excel (.xls).

Pocket Excel lists the files stored on the PPT 2800. Tap a file in the list to open it. To delete, make copies of, or send a file, tap and hold a file in the list, then select the appropriate action from the pop-up menu.

7-8

Companion Programs

Pocket Excel provides fundamental spreadsheet tools, such as formulas, functions, sorting, and filtering. To display the toolbar, tap View - Toolbar.

Figure 7-5. Using Pocket Excel

If a workbook contains sensitive information, protect it with a password. Open the workbook, then tap Edit - Password. Every time you open the workbook, you must enter the password, so choose one easy to remember but hard for others to guess.

Tips for Working in Pocket ExcelWhen working in large worksheets in Pocket Excel:

• View in full-screen mode to see as much of the worksheet as possible. Tap View - Full Screen. To exit full-screen mode, tap Restore.

• Show and hide window elements. Tap View, then the elements to show or hide.• Freeze panes on a worksheet. First select the cell, then tap View - Freeze Panes.

Freeze the top and leftmost panes in a worksheet to keep row and column labels visible when scrolling.

• Split panes to view different areas of a large worksheet. Tap View - Split. Drag the split bar to where you want it. To remove the split, tap View - Remove Split.

• Show and hide rows and columns. To hide a row or column, select a cell in that row or column. Tap Format - Row or Column - Hide. To show a hidden row or column, tap Tools - Go To, then type a reference that is in the hidden row or column. Tap Format - Row or Column - Unhide.

Zoom button.

AutoSum button.Format button.

Cell contents appear here as they are entered.

7-9


For more information on using Pocket Excel, tap Start - Help.

MSN® MessengerWith the MSN Messenger instant messaging program on the PPT 2800 you can:

• see who is online• send and receive instant messages• have instant message conversations with groups of contacts.

MSN Messenger requires a Microsoft Passport™ account or a Microsoft Exchange e-mail account. You need a Passport to use MSN Messenger Service. If you have a Hotmail® or MSN account, you have a passport. Once you have either a Microsoft Passport or a Microsoft Exchange account, you can set up the account.

To switch to MSN Messenger, tap Start - Programs - MSN Messenger icon.

Setting Up an AccountSet up the Passport or Exchange account and sign in:

1. Tap Tools - Options.2. Enter an e-mail address and password.3. Tap Sign In.

If you use MSN Messenger on the desktop computer, contacts automatically appear on the terminal.

7-10

Companion Programs

Working with ContactsThe MSN Messenger window is divided into Online and Not Online categories. From this view, while connected, you can chat, send e-mail, block the contact from chatting with you, or delete contacts from the list using the pop-up menu.

Figure 7-6. MSN Messenger Contacts

Note: To see others online without being seen, tap Tools - My Status - Appear Offline.

To unblock a contact, tap and hold the contact, then tap Unblock on the pop-up menu.

Chatting with ContactsTap a contact name to open a chat window. Enter a message in the text entry area at the bottom of the screen, or tap My Text to enter a preset message, and tap Send. To invite another contact to a multi-user chat, tap Tools - Invite and tap the contact.


Tap a contact to start a chat.

7-11


Figure 7-7. Sending a Message

To switch back to the main window without closing a chat, tap Contacts. To revert back to the chat window, tap Chats and select the MSN Messenger contact to chat with.

To know if the contact is responding, look for the message under the text entry area.

Figure 7-8. Receiving a Message

Tap to send a message.

Enter a message.

View the status of the chat.

View full chat.

7-12

Companion Programs

For more information on using MSN Messenger, tap Start - Help.

Windows Media PlayerPlay digital audio and video files stored on the terminal with Windows Media Player. To switch to Windows Media Player, tap Start - Windows Media.

Figure 7-9. Using Windows Media Player

Use the desktop computer to copy digital audio and video files to the terminal. The terminal can play Windows Media and MP3 files.

For more information on using Windows Media Player, tap Start - Help.

Indicates the progress of the current track.

Slide to adjust volume.

Tap to skip to the next song.

Tap to play a previous song.

Tap to stop.Tap to play or pause.

Tap to turn volume on/off.

7-13


7-14

Chapter 8 Pocket Internet Explorer

Chapter ContentsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Mobile Favorites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Favorite Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Creating Mobile Favorites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Saving Memory on the Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Using AvantGo Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Using Pocket Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Browsing the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Copy Pictures to the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Edit Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Send Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Set Picture as Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9View Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9View Slideshow of Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

8-1


8-2

Pocket Internet Explorer

IntroductionUse Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer to view Web or WAP pages in the following ways:

• During synchronization with the desktop computer, download favorite links and mobile favorites stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in Internet Explorer on the desktop computer.

• Connect to an Internet service provider (ISP) or network and browse the Web. First create the connection (see Chapter 9, Connections).

To select Pocket Internet Explorer, tap Start - Internet Explorer.

Mobile FavoritesItems stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites folder in Internet Explorer on the desktop computer are synchronized with the terminal. This folder was created automatically when ActiveSync was installed.

Favorite LinksSynchronization updates the list of favorite links both in the Mobile Favorites folder on the desktop computer and in Pocket Internet Explorer on the terminal. Unless you mark the favorite link as a mobile favorite, only the link is downloaded to the terminal. Connect to the ISP or network to view the content. For more information on synchronization, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer.

Creating Mobile Favorites If the desktop computer is using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5, you can download mobile favorites. Synchronizing mobile favorites downloads Web content to the terminal so you can view Web pages while disconnected from the ISP and desktop computer.

Use the Internet Explorer plug-in installed with ActiveSync to create mobile favorites:

1. In Internet Explorer on the desktop computer, click Tools - Create Mobile Favorite.2. To change the link name, enter a new name in the Name field. 3. If desired, select an update schedule in Update.4. Click OK. Internet Explorer downloads the latest version of the Web page to the

desktop computer.5. To download the pages linked to the mobile favorite created on the desktop

computer, in Internet Explorer on the desktop computer, right-click the mobile

8-3


favorite, then click Properties. On the Download tab, specify the number of links deep to download. To conserve terminal memory, only go one level deep.

6. Synchronize the terminal and desktop computer. Mobile favorites stored in the Mobile Favorites folder in Internet Explorer are downloaded to the terminal.

If you did not specify an update schedule in step 3, manually download content to keep the information updated on the desktop computer and terminal. Before synchronizing, in Internet Explorer on the desktop computer, click Tools - Synchronize. Note the last time content was downloaded to the desktop computer; if necessary, manually download content.

To add a button to the Internet Explorer toolbar for creating mobile favorites, in Internet Explorer on the desktop computer, click View - Toolbars - Customize.

Saving Memory on the TerminalMobile favorites take up storage memory on the terminal. To minimize the amount of memory used:

• In the settings for the Favorites information type in ActiveSync options, turn off pictures and sounds or stop some mobile favorites from downloading. For more information, see ActiveSync Help.

• Limit the number of downloaded linked pages. In Internet Explorer on the desktop computer, right-click the mobile favorite to be changed, then select Properties. On the Download tab, specify 0 or 1 for the number of linked pages to download.

8-4


Using AvantGo ChannelsAvantGo is a free interactive service that provides access to personalized content and thousands of popular Web sites. Subscribe to AvantGo channels directly from the terminal, then synchronize with the desktop computer, or connect to the Internet to download the content. For more information, visit the AvantGo Web site.

To sign up for AvantGo:

1. In ActiveSync options on the desktop computer, turn on synchronization for the AvantGo information type.

2. In Pocket Internet Explorer on the terminal, tap the Favorites icon to display a list of favorites.

3. Tap AvantGo Channels.4. Tap Activate.5. Follow the directions on the screen to synchronize the terminal with the desktop

computer, then tap My Channels to complete setup.When synchronization is complete, tap AvantGo Channels in the list of favorites to see a few of the most popular channels. To add or remove channels, tap Add or Remove.

8-5


Using Pocket Internet ExplorerUse Pocket Internet Explorer to browse mobile favorites and channels downloaded to the terminal without connecting to the Internet. Or connect to the Internet through an ISP or a network connection and browse the Web.

Figure 8-1. Pocket Internet Explorer

Favorites button

Home button

Refresh button

Back button

8-6


To view mobile favorites and channels, tap the Favorites icon to display the list of favorites, then tap the page to view.

Figure 8-2. Mobile Favorites

The page that was downloaded during the last synchronization with the desktop computer displays. If the page is not on the terminal, the favorite is dimmed. Synchronize with the desktop computer again to download the page to the terminal, or connect to the Internet to view the page.

Browsing the Web1. Connect to the ISP or network using a Spectrum24 connection; see Chapter 9,

Connections.2. Once connected, go to a specific Web page in one of the following ways:

• Tap Favorites, then tap the favorite.• In the address bar at the top of the screen, enter the Web address and tap the

go button or tap the arrow to choose from previously entered addresses.

Tap to add or delete a folder or favorite link.

Tap the favorite.

8-7


Note: If Pocket Internet Explorer was selected before setting up the network connections, a connection settings screen may appear. After selecting the settings, return to Pocket Internet Explorer.

To add a favorite link while using the terminal, go to the Web page, tap and hold on the page and tap Add to Favorites.

PicturesUse Pictures to view .jpg format pictures stored on the terminal, send pictures to others, view a slideshow of pictures or set a picture as the background on the Today screen.

Copy Pictures to the Device.jpg pictures can be copied from the PC and viewed on the terminal in Pictures.

Copy the picture files from the PC to the My Pictures folder, within the My Documents folder on the terminal. For more information on copying files from the PC to the terminal, see ActiveSync Help on the PC.

Edit PicturesTo rotate, crop, zoom and adjust the brightness and color contrast:

• Tap to rotate a picture 90 degrees counter-clockwise.• Tap to crop a picture by dragging and selecting the crop area. Tap outside of

the box to stop cropping. • Tap to display the Zoom panel, to zoom in or out of a picture, or return a picture

to full-screen size.• Tap Edit - Brightness and Contrast to adjust the brightness and contrast levels of a

picture.

Send PicturesYou can send a .jpg picture to others as an e-mail attachment. The picture is resized to approximately 30 KB, making it easier to send over wireless connections.

1. In Pictures, tap the picture to be sent as an e-mail attachment.2. Tap Tools - Send via E-mail to create an e-mail message with the picture attached.

8-8


Set Picture as BackgroundUse any .jpg picture as the background on the Today screen. Also specify display parameters, such as adjusting the transparency level.

1. In Pictures, tap the picture to be set as the background.2. Tap Tools - Set as Today Wallpaper.

View PicturesUse Pictures to view thumbnails of .jpg pictures stored in the My Pictures folder and select a picture to see in full-screen view.

1. In Pictures, tap the thumbnail of the picture to view it.2. Tap to view pictures stored on a storage card.3. Tap to view pictures stored in the My Pictures folder.

View Slideshow of Pictures.jpg pictures can be viewed as a slideshow. Pictures displays slides of the pictures shown in thumbnail view with 5-second intervals between slides.

1. In Pictures, tap to view pictures as a slideshow.2. Tap anywhere on the screen to display the Slideshow toolbar, which can be used

to pause the slideshow, rotate the view and more.3. Press the left/right controls to move forward or backward through the slides.

8-9


8-10

Chapter 9 Connections

Chapter ContentsIIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Transferring Items Using Infrared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Connecting to an ISP or a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Setting Up an E-mail Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Getting Help Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

9-1


9-2

Connections

IntroductionThe terminal can exchange information with other Windows-powered devices via the cradle or cable, or through the following connection options:

• Use the infrared (IR) port to send and receive files between two terminals. SeeTransferring Items Using Infrared on page 9-4.

• Connect to a network or the Internet service provider (ISP) to send and receive e-mail messages using Inbox and view Web or WAP pages using Pocket Internet Explorer. See Connecting to an ISP or a Network on page 9-5. The communication software for creating an ISP connection is already installed on the terminal. The service provider provides software needed to install other services, such as paging and fax services.

• Wirelessly via Spectrum24 LAN. See Chapter 10, Spectrum24 Network Configuration.

• Connect to the desktop computer to synchronize remotely. See ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer or Connections Help on the terminal.

9-3


Transferring Items Using InfraredUsing infrared (IR), two Windows-powered devices can exchange information, such as contacts and appointments.

To send information:

1. Open the program where you created the item to send, and locate the item in the list.

2. Align the IR ports so they are unobstructed and within close range.3. Tap and hold the item, and tap Beam [item] on the pop-up menu.

Note: To send items (not folders) from File Explorer, tap and hold the item, then tap Beam File on the pop-up menu.

To receive information, align the IR ports so they are unobstructed and within close range. When information is sent from the other device, the terminal receives it automatically.

Note: For IR receive to work automatically, check the Receive all incoming beams and select discoverable mode checkbox in Start -Settings - Connections - Beam. If this box is not checked, select Start Programs Infrared Receive before receiving data from another device.

9-4

Connections

Connecting to an ISP or a NetworkYou can use a modem to connect to an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Once connected, you can send and receive e-mail messages and view Web or WAP pages.

To create a modem connection to an ISP or network, use the modem cradle or snap-on modem. See the Quick Reference Guide for each device for connection information.

1. Get the ISP dial-up access telephone number, user name, password, and TCP/IP settings from the ISP or network administrator. Some ISPs require information in front of the user name, such as MSN/username.

2. Tap Start - Settings - Connections tab - Connections icon.3. To connect to an ISP, in the Connections window, select Add a new modem

connection under My ISP.

To connect to a network, in the Connections window, select Add a new modem connection under My Work Network.

Figure 9-1. Connections Window

9-5


4. Enter a name for the connection. In the Select a modem: drop-down menu, select Hayes Compatible on COM1, then tap Next.

Figure 9-2. Selecting a Connection

5. Enter the access phone number in the My Connection window and tap Next.

Figure 9-3. Entering Phone Number

9-6

Connections

6. If necessary, enter the user name, password, and domain.

Figure 9-4. Entering User Information

7. The settings in Advanced should not need to be changed. Most ISPs now use a server-assigned address. If the ISP does not use a server-assigned address, tap Advanced.a. On the General and Port Settings tab, select connection settings such as baud

rate, data bits, and parity. Dialing options are also available. Tap ok when finished.

Figure 9-5. Advanced Settings - General and Port Settings Tabs

9-7


b. Review the TCP/IP and Servers tabs and enter the addresses per their instructions. When finished, tap ok.

Figure 9-6. Advanced Settings - TCP/IP and Servers Tabs

8. In the My Connection window, tap Finish.

To start the connection:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Connections tab - Connections.2. In the Connections window, tap Manage existing connections.


9-8

Connections

3. Tap and hold the connection name, then select Connect from the menu that appears. The modem attempts to connect.

Figure 9-8. Connecting

The following programs connect the terminal automatically:

• Send and receive e-mail messages using Inbox. Before using Inbox, provide the information it needs to communicate with the e-mail server. See Connecting Directly to an E-mail Server.

• Visit Internet or intranet Web or WAP pages using Pocket Internet Explorer. • Synchronize. For more information, see ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer.

DisconnectingChoose one of the following ways to disconnect:

• When connected via dial-up or VPN, tap the Connection icon on the navigation bar, then tap End.

• When connected via cable or serial cradle, detach the terminal from the cable or cradle.

• When connected via Infrared, move the terminal away from the desktop computer.

9-9


Connecting Directly to an E-mail ServerSet up a connection to an e-mail server to send and receive e-mail messages using a modem or network connection and Inbox on the terminal.

Note: The ISP or network must use a POP3 e-mail server and an SMTP gateway.

To use multiple e-mail services to receive messages, first set up and name each e-mail service. If using the same service to connect to different mailboxes, set up and name each mailbox connection.

Setting Up an E-mail ServiceIn Inbox, tap Services - New Service. Follow the instructions in the New Service wizard on the screen. For an explanation of a screen, tap Start - Help.

When finished, tap Services - Connect to connect to the e-mail server. For more information on using the Inbox program, see Inbox on page 6-14.

Getting Help ConnectingSee the following for more connection information:

• Inbox on page 6-14.• Online Help on the terminal. Tap Start - Help - View, All Installed Help, then Inbox

or Connections.• ActiveSync Help on the desktop computer. In ActiveSync, click Microsoft

ActiveSync Help on the Help menu.• Maintenance and Troubleshooting on page 14-1.

9-10

Chapter 10 Spectrum24 Network Configuration

Chapter ContentsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Mobile Companion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Finding WLANs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Changing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Configuring the Radio Using a Registration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

10-1


10-2

Spectrum24 Network Configuration

IntroductionWireless LANs allow PPT 284X terminals to communicate wirelessly, and to send captured data “real time” to a host device. Before a terminal can be used on a Spectrum24 LAN your facility must be set up with the equipment required to run the wireless LAN and the terminal must be properly configured. Refer to the documentation that came with the Access Points (APs) for instructions on setting up the required hardware.

The PPT 284X terminal Network Adapter settings and Spectrum24 settings configure and monitor the wireless connection. The Mobile Companion icon appears in the task tray, and indicates terminal signal strength as follows:

Icon Status

Excellent signal strength

Very good signal strength

Good signal strength

Fair signal strength

Poor signal strength

Out-of-network range (not associated)

10-3


Mobile CompanionUse the Mobile Companion utility to configure the terminal’s wireless network settings. The Mobile Companion utility starts automatically and appears as an icon on the task tray. The status icon changes in real-time to reflect the signal strength and availability of the adapter and the wireless network. Tap the icon on the task tray to open the Mobile Companion menu.

Figure 10-1. Mobile Companion Menu

Mobile Companion icon

Mobile Companion Menu

10-4


When the menu opens, select Status, WLAN Profiles, Find WLANs or Options from menu.

Table 10-1. Mobile Companion Menu Descriptions

Menu Item Description

Status Displays the current status and information for the wireless connection.

Signal tab view - displays radio signal transmission strength from the adapter (using its current profile) to the associated AP.

Info tab view - displays software, driver, firmware, hardware, and country information for the current profile.

IP Status tab view - displays network address information.

Ping tab view - displays signal strength data, data rate, and conduct data transmission tests between the terminal and associated AP or client.APs tab view - displays APs with the same ESSID as the current terminal profile. The terminal's roaming capabilities can be set from this tab. When not in Ad Hoc operating mode, the APs tab displays instead of the Peers tab.

Peers tab view - displays the BSSIDs, power modes, transmit rates and data rates of other networked clients within the Ad Hoc (peer-to-peer) network. When in Ad Hoc operating mode, the Peers tab view displays instead of the APs tab.

WLAN Profiles Displays the current profiles and allows you to add, edit and delete profiles.

Find WLANs Displays a list of Spectrum24 networks (APs and networked peers) available to the terminal for association. The networks are listed by their ESSID. To the right of each network is a signal strength icon. Networks with a signal strength of Good (three green bars out of five) or better should be considered for connection. Tap a network and tap Connect to interoperate with the AP representing that network. Once connected, the Mode, Encryption, IP Config and Power tab views display the ESSID, security settings, network address information and power consumption level set for that network. See Finding WLANs on page 10-6 for more information.

10-5


Finding WLANsA completed profile is a set of terminal configuration settings that can be used in different locations to connect to a Spectrum24 network. Create different profiles to have pre-defined terminal operating parameters available for use in various Spectrum24 network environments.

1. Select Find WLANs from the Mobile Companion menu to locate the APs in the area. The Mobile Companion window displays the available WLAN networks.

Figure 10-2. Available WLAN Networks

2. Select an available WLAN network from the list box.

Options Displays settings for configuring battery consumption avoidance capabilities, system sounds, AP and terminal association capabilities, profile roaming options, as well as the password protecting the Mobile Companion utility.

Table 10-1. Mobile Companion Menu Descriptions (Continued)

Menu Item Description

10-6


3. Tap Connect. The Mode tab appears.

Figure 10-3. Mode Tab

4. The Profile Name: and 802.11 ESSID: fields contain the name and (WLAN) identifier of the network connection. Change the Profile Name if desired.Use the Profile Name field to enter the name of the terminal profile used to transmit with either an AP or another networked computer.

The ESSID is the 802.11 Extended Service Set Identifier. The ESSID is 32-character (maximum) string identifying the WLAN. The ESSID assigned to the terminal is required to match the AP ESSID for the terminal to communicate with the AP.

5. Select the operating mode from the Operating Mode: drop-down list:

Infrastructure Select Infrastructure to enable the terminal to transmit and receive data with an AP. Infrastructure is the terminal default mode when Mobile Companion initially displays.

Ad Hoc Select Ad Hoc to enable the terminal to form its own local network where terminals communicate peer-to-peer without APs using a shared ESSID. Select the Long preamble check box if the terminal and its profile are using a long preamble when transmitting data. A long preamble is approximately 8 bytes of the packet header attached to the packet prior to transmission. Devices in Ad Hoc mode must use the same preamble length to interoperate. The terminal initiating the Ad Hoc network sets the channel (using the Channel drop-down list) used by each peer in the Ad Hoc network.

Infrastructure Mode Ad Hoc Mode

10-7


6. Select the country of operation for the terminal from the Country: drop-down list. This ensures the terminal is using country code information compatible with the country code data used by the associated AP. Select International if using the terminal with a non-Symbol AP or a pre AP 4131 model.

7. Select the Encryption tab to set the terminal profile security level.

Figure 10-4. Encryption Tab

The terminal supports Open System (no encryption), 40-bit Shared Key, 128-bit Shared Key, Kerberos and LEAP encryption algorithms. The absence of a physical connection makes wireless links vulnerable to information theft. Encryption is an efficient method of preventing data theft and improving data security.

The AP and the terminal must use the same encryption algorithm to associate and transmit data. If an AP is set to Open System and an adapter is set to 40-bit or 128-bit, no association takes place. Similarly, if an adapter is set to Open System and an AP is set to 40-bit or 128-bit, no association takes place.

If an AP is set to 40-bit and a terminal is set to 128-bit the terminal can associate with the AP, but no data transmission and reception can take place.

8. Select one of the following Encryption options from the Algorithm: drop-down list:

Open System(no encryption)

Use the Open System option as the default setting when no data packet encryption is needed over the network. Selecting Open System provides no security for data being transmitted over the network.

40-bit Shared Key

Select 40-bit encryption and enter a 10-digit hex encryption key. Tap Reset Keys to set the encryption key to the default values.

10-8


128-bit Shared Key

Select 128-bit encryption and enter a 26-digit hex encryption key. The 128-bit encryption option provides a higher level of security than 40-bit encryption while maintaining an 11 Mbps data rate. Tap Reset Keys to set the encryption key to the default values.

Note: The default Hex digit keys are visible any time they are used. As a security precaution after setting the key values for the network, the digits are replaced with asterisks * within the encryption key fields.

If the associated AP is using an optional Passkey, the "active" terminal profile is required to use one as well. The Passkey is a plain text representation of the WEP keys displayed in the Encryption tab. The Passkey provides an easy way to enter WEP key data without having to remember the entire 40-bit (10 character) or 128-bit (26 character) Hex digit string.Tap Passkey to display the Passkey window. Enter an easy-to-remember 4 to 26 character string to be used as the WEP algorithm. Tap OK. The AP transforms the Passkey string into a set of four WEP keys using MD5 algorithms and displays them in the WEP fields. These are the new WEP keys for the terminal profile. Once displayed in the WEP key fields, the adapter profile behaves as if the keys were entered manually.

Kerberos Kerberos is a different form of 128-bit data security whereby a terminal is required to have its request for AP resources authenticated with a Kerberos server before the server permits the AP to transmit and receive data with the associated terminal.Select Kerberos and enter the key distribution center (KDC) and Realm values. The KDC is located on a server and maintains information about the APs and users it supports. The KDC also permits the transmission and receipt of data once the credentials of the user are verified. Enter the name of the server that hosts the Kerberos KDC in the Realm field.

10-9


9. Select the IP Config tab to configure the following terminal profile network address parameters: IP address, subnet, gateway, DNS and WINS. Changes made within the IP Config tab only impact the profile selected in the Mode tab and do not impact the network address parameters configured for other profiles.

Figure 10-5. Mobile Companion - IP Config Tab (DHCP)

• Select Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) from the IP Type drop-down list to obtain a leased IP address and network configuration information from a remote server. DHCP is the default setting for the terminal profile. When DHCP is selected, the IP address fields are read-only.

• Select Static to manually assign the IP, subnet mask, default gateway, DNS and WINS addresses used by the terminal profile.

LEAP LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an 802.1X authentication type for wireless LANs that supports strong mutual authentication between the client and a RADIUS server. It provides dynamic per-user, per-session Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) key enhancements to mitigate a variety of network attacks.Select LEAP. When connecting to the server, the Network Log On screen displays. Enter user name, password and domain name. Consult the system administrator for this information.

10-10


Figure 10-6. Mobile Companion - IP Config Tab (Static)

IP Address The Internet is a collection of networks with users that communicate with each other. Each communication carries the address of the source and destination networks and the particular machine within the network associated with the user or host computer at each end. This address is called the IP address (Internet Protocol address). Each node on the IP network is assigned a unique IP address that is made up of a network identifier and a host identifier. Enter the IP address as a dotted-decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period, for example, 192.168.7.27.

Subnet Mask Most TCP/IP networks use subnets to effectively manage routed IP addresses. Having an organization's network divided into subnets allows it to be connected to the Internet with a single shared network address, for example, 255.255.255.0.

Gateway The default gateway is a device used to forward IP packets to and from a remote destination.

DNS The Domain Name System (DNS) is a distributed Internet directory service. DNS is used to translate domain names and IP addresses. It also controls Internet email delivery. Most Internet service requires DNS to operate properly. If DNS is not configured, Web sites cannot be located and/or email delivery fails.

10-11


10. Select the Power tab to set the Radio Transmission Power level and the Power Saving Modes for the terminal profile.

Figure 10-7. Mobile Companion - Power Tab

11. Adjust the Radio Transmission Power level to expand or confine the transmission area with respect to other wireless devices that could be operating nearby. Reduce a coverage area in high traffic areas to improve transmission quality by reducing the number of noises in that coverage area.• In Infrastructure mode there are two transmission power options:

• Select Automatic to use the AP power level. Automatic is the default mode for terminals operating in Infrastructure mode.

• Select Power Plus to set the terminal transmission power one level higher than the level set for the AP.

• In Ad Hoc mode there are five transmission power options:• Select Maximum power to set the terminal to the highest transmission

power level. Select Maximum power when operating in highly reflective environments and areas where other devices could be operating nearby. Additionally, use the maximum power level when attempting to communicate with devices at the outer edge of a coverage area.

• Select 50%, 25% or 10% to set the transmit power level to that percentage of the maximum power level.

WINS WINS is a Microsoft® Net BIOS name server. WINS eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations.

Infrastructure Mode Ad Hoc Mode

10-12


• Select Minimum power to set the terminal to the lowest transmission power level. Use the minimum power level when communicating with other devices in very close proximity. Additionally, select minimum power in instances where little or no radio interference from other devices is anticipated.

• The Automatic Power Saving Mode switches to Best Network Performance when an AC power supply is detected. If a battery is used, an appropriate setting between Best Network Performance and Acceptable Network Performance is automatically chosen based on a real-time analysis of network usage. The Automatic Power Saving Mode is the default setting and extends the operating time before the battery is recharged.

• Use the Manual Power Saving Mode to select a performance level suited to the intended operation. There are six settings ranging from the Best Network Performance (using the most battery power) to Acceptable Network Performance (using the least battery power). A network performance description is displayed for each power range.

12. Tap OK to implement power consumption changes for the terminal profile.

StatusTo view the status of the wireless network connection, select Status from the Mobile Companion menu.

1. Select the Signal tab to view a real-time graph of the signal quality of the terminal to the associated AP (Infrastructure Mode only), including the number of times the terminal has roamed to and from APs, the current data rate, and network status. Signal quality indicates how clearly the adapter can hear the associated AP.

Figure 10-8. Mobile Companion - Signal Tab

10-13


Note: The Signal tab is view only and is not available in Ad Hoc operating mode.

2. Select the Info tab to view the terminal’s current software and driver revision data as well as the operating parameters of the current profile.

Figure 10-9. Mobile Companion - Info Tab

Missed Beacons Displays the amount of beacons (uniform system packets broadcast by the AP to keep the network synchronized) missed by the terminal. The fewer the missed beacons the better the signal. As long as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized by an excess of missed AP beacons. If the LED is red, an association with a different AP could be warranted to reduce the amount of missed beacons and improve the signal.

Txmit Retries (Transmit Retries)

Displays the number of data packets retransmitted by the terminal. The fewer transmit retries the stronger the signal. As long as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized. If the LED is red, an association with a different AP could be warranted to reduce the amount of transmit retries and improve the signal.

Signal Displays the Relative Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) of the signal transmitted between the AP and terminal. As long as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized. If the LED is red, an association with a different AP could be warranted to improve the signal.

10-14


3. Select the IP Status tab to view the terminal’s network address information. Unlike the IP Config tab in Finding WLANs, the IP Status tab is view only with no user-configurable data fields.

Figure 10-10. Mobile Companion - IP Status Tab

Version Information

Displays the terminal's software, driver, firmware and hardware versions as well as country information. This data is consistent for the terminal regardless of which terminal profile is the current profile.

Current Status Displays the terminal’s current Profile Name, ESSID, and Encryption mode. Terminal performance is displayed using a verbal indicator of signal strength. Terminal operating information differs depending on which profile has been enabled as the current profile.

IP Type If DHCP was selected from the IP Config tab, leased IP address and network address data displays for the terminal. If Static was selected, the values displayed were input manually in the IP Config tab on page 10-11.

10-15


4. Tap Renew to refresh the information displayed on the IP Status tab.

IP Address The Internet is a collection of networks with users that communicate with each other. Each communication carries the address of the source and destination networks and the particular machine within the network associated with the user or host computer at each end. This address is called the IP address. Each node on the IP network is assigned a unique IP address that is made up of a network identifier and a host identifier. Enter the IP address as a dotted-decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period, for example, 192.168.7.27.

Subnet Mask Most TCP/IP networks use subnets to effectively manage routed IP addresses. Having an organization's network divided into subnets allows it to be connected to the Internet with a single shared network address, for example, 255.255.255.0.

Gateway The gateway is a device used to forward IP packets to and from a remote destination.

DNS The Domain Name System (DNS) is a distributed Internet directory service. DNS is used mostly to translate domain names and IP addresses. It also controls Internet e-mail delivery. Most Internet service requires DNS to operate properly. If DNS is not configured, Web sites cannot be located or e-mail delivery fails.

WINS WINS is a Microsoft Net BIOS name server. WINS eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations.

MAC Address An IEEE 48-bit address the terminal is assigned at the factory that uniquely identifies the adapter at the physical layer.

Host Name Displays the name of the terminal.

10-16


5. Select the Ping tab to send and receive ICMP ping packets across the network to the specified IP address.

Figure 10-11. Mobile Companion - Ping Tab

6. Select a target device IP address from the IP drop-down list.7. Select the size of the packet transmission from the Size drop-down list.8. Tap Start Test to begin the ping test.9. Tap Stop Test to terminate the ping test.

The average mega-bits per second, signal strength, data rate currently in use, test statistics and round trip (RT) times are displayed for each test. The associated AP MAC address is also displayed. The signal strength level and the data transmission rate are displayed in real-time bar graphs.

10. Select the APs tab to view APs with the same ESSID as the terminal’s profile.

Figure 10-12. Mobile Companion - APs Tab

The associated AP displays a radio wave radiating from its antenna to indicate its associated status. Tapping on the icon displays a menu with Set Mandatory and Set Roaming options.

10-17


Select the Set Mandatory item to prohibit the terminal from associating with a different AP. The letter M displays on top of the icon when the Set Mandatory option is selected.

Select Set Roaming to allow the terminal to roam to any AP with a better signal. These settings are temporary and never saved to the registry.

Tap Refresh to update the list of the APs with the same ESSID. A signal strength value of 32 is the highest possible. The APs tab only displays when the Infrastructure operating mode is selected from the Mode tab.

11. If the terminal is in Ad Hoc mode, select the Peers tab to display the BSSID or MAC addresses of the other terminals in the network, their operating mode (PSP or CAM), their transmit rate, their supported data rate and the length of time an adapter has been out of the Ad Hoc network. Tap Refresh to update the Peers tab to the latest Ad Hoc network performance and terminal membership data.

Figure 10-13. Mobile Companion - Peers Tab

10-18


Setting OptionsSelect Options from the Mobile Companion menu to enable or disable international roaming, configure consumption avoidance capabilities, enable system sounds, and set temporary settings.

Figure 10-14. Mobile Companion - Option Settings

1. Select the Access AP networks check box to display available AP networks and their signal strength within the Available WLAN Networks tab. These are the APs available to the terminal profile for association. If this option was previously disabled, refresh the Available WLAN Networks tab to display the AP networks available to the terminal.

2. Select the Access Ad-Hoc networks check box to display available peer (adapter) networks and their signal strength within the Available WLAN Networks tab. These are peers available to the terminal profile for association. If this option was previously disabled, refresh the Available WLAN Networks tab to display the Ad Hoc networks available to the terminal.

3. Select the Disable Profile Roaming check box to disable the terminal from roaming and associating to APs with country codes other than the United States.

4. Select the Enable Sounds check box to initiate an audible signal when performing a ping test and associating with an AP. The tones are important to notify users if the pinging is received or if the terminal has roamed to another AP.

Note: Mobile Companion has a password protection feature. When Mobile Companion initially displays, the password is off by default.

10-19


5. To create a password, tap Change Password.

Figure 10-15. Mobile Companion - Change Password

6. Enter a case sensitive password (10 characters maximum) in the Current Password field and tap OK. To change the current password, enter the current password in the Current Password field and enter a new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields and tap OK.

Changing ProfilesSelect WLAN Profiles from the Mobile Companion menu to view, connect to, create and edit a profile. A completed profile is a set of adapter configuration settings that can be used in different locations to connect to a wireless network. Create different profiles to have pre-defined operating parameters available for use in various network environments. When the WLAN Profiles window initially displays, existing profiles appear in the WLAN Profiles list box.

Figure 10-16. Mobile Companion - WLAN Profiles

Select a profile from the list box and tap Connect to set that profile as the active profile. The active profile displays the transmit and receive icon to the left. Once selected, the terminal uses the ESSID, encryption and power consumption settings initially configured for that profile.

10-20


Editing a ProfileTo change the ESSID and operating mode for the profile, select a profile from the list box and tap Edit to display the Mode tab. Use the Encryption, IP Config, and Power tabs as necessary to edit the profile power consumption and security parameters.

Creating a New ProfileTo set the profile name and ESSID, tap New to display the Mode tab. Use the Encryption, IP Config and Power tabs as required to set security, network address information and power consumption level for the new profile.

Deleting a ProfileTo remove a profile, select the profile from the list box and tap Delete.

Ordering ProfilesTo order a profile, select the profile from the list box and tap Move Up or Move Down. If the current profile association is lost, Mobile Companion attempts to associate with the first profile in the list and then the next until a new association is achieved.

10-21


Configuring the Radio Using a Registration FileDefault settings for the Spectrum24 radio card can be set on the terminal using a registration (.reg) file. A sample .reg file is provided as part of the DCP. Edit the file using a text editor. See notes in the sample file for the key information that can be modified.

Save this text file as SPECTRUM24DS.REG. Use ActiveSync to copy this file to the Platform folder on the terminal. Once this file is loaded onto the terminal, these settings are restored after a cold boot.

Note: Refer to the DCP for the latest SPECTRUM24DS.REG sample file.

10-22

Chapter 11 Wireless Wide Area Network Configuration

Chapter ContentsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3Establishing a GPRS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

GPRS Parameters Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3Configuring a GPRS WAN Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16Connecting via GPRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19

Establishing a GSM CSD Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21Installing the GSM Demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21Verifying the Functionality of the SIM Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21Configuring a GSM WAN Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24Connecting via GSM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27

11-1


11-2

Wireless Wide Area Network Configuration

IntroductionThe PPT 2837 can be used on a GSM/GPRS wireless network.

Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) networks deliver mobile voice and data services (such as SMS/Text Messaging) with full roaming capabilities across the world.

General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) enabled networks offer Internet-based content and packet-based data services. This enables services such as internet browsing, e-mail on the move, powerful visual communications, multimedia messages and location-based services.

Note: Before using a terminal on a GSM/GPRS wireless network, select a provider and establish a voice and data-enabled service plan, and configure the terminal.

Establishing a GPRS ConnectionTo establish a GPRS connection:

1. Configure GPRS parameters.2. Configure a GPRS WAN connection (see page 11-16).

GPRS Parameters ConfigurationTwo options are available to configure the GPRS parameters:

• Using GSM Demo, a GUI interface that enables editing network-specific GPRS parameters.

• Using the registry file (a text file that is uploaded to the terminal) to configure the network-specific GPRS parameters.

Configuring GSM Parameters Using GSM DemoThe GSM Demo utility is a GUI interface that simplifies the process of configuring GPRS parameters. To configure GPRS parameters:

1. Install the GSM Demo application.2. Verify the functionality of the SIM card.3. Edit the GPRS parameters.

11-3


Installing the GSM Demo ApplicationEnsure the GSMDemo application is installed on the terminal. Tap Start - Programs - File Explorer and navigate to the Applications folder. If GSMDemo is not listed, see GSM Demo Installation on page C-1 for installation instructions.

Verifying the Functionality of the SIM Card1. Ensure that a SIM card is installed in the terminal. See Installing the SIM Card (PPT

2837 Only) on page 1-7.

Note: To connect to a GPRS WAN connection, the SIM card must be GPRS enabled. Contact the service provider for information.

2. Ensure that the GSM Demo Application is installed on the terminal. Tap Start - Programs - File Explorer on the terminal and navigate to the Applications folder. If GSMDemo is not listed, see GSM Demo Installation on page C-1.

3. If GSMDemo is listed, select GSM Demo.As GSM Demo launches, it opens the internal serial port to the GSM modem and attempts to register with a network. The terminal displays the main GSM Demo window.

Figure 11-1. Main GSM Demo Window

The Network Status field displays the following messages as the modem attempts to connect: Opening GSM com port, Initializing modem, Checking SIM Card and Configuring modem. Once a successful connection is made, the field displays Registered Home or Registered Roam (if out of network).

11-4


4. If the Network Status field displays Searching... and a connection is not made:a. Tap Options - Settings - Change Band.

Figure 11-2. Change Band Window

b. Make the appropriate selection, depending on the location:• Select 1900Mhz for North America• Select 900/1800Mhz for Europe, Asia, Australia and Africa.If necessary, contact the service provider to confirm the band information.

c. Tap Change.d. In the pop-up Confirm window, tap Yes. The terminal displays the main GSM

Demo window, and the Network Status field displays Cycling Power. Restarting.

11-5


5. A successful registration, indicated by signal strength (as shown below), ensures the functionality of the SIM card.

Figure 11-3. Main GSM Demo Window

GPRS availability, through the network, is indicated by the GPRS icon.

Editing GPRS Parameters1. Tap Options - Settings - GPRS Parameters.

11-6


2. Make the appropriate changes, as per Table 11-1, on the PDP Context tab.

Figure 11-4. GPRS Parameters - PDP Context Tab

Table 11-1. PDP Context Tab Fields

Field Name Description

Table Version System generated. Contains internal version number representing the structure of the registry file.

Context ID Each set of parameters is collectively called a context. You can store three contexts. Select the number representing the particular set of context.

Context Each set of parameters is collectively called a context. Enter a name for the context.

PDP Type Information obtained from service provider. This represents the protocol type.

APN Information obtained from service provider. This represents the access point name.

PDP Address Information obtained from service provider.• If provider supports DHCP, this field is blank.• If provider does not support DHCP, obtain

address from provider.

11-7


3. Tap the Min. Qos. tab and make the appropriate changes, as per Table 11-2.This tab configures the quality of minimum service accepted from the provider.

Figure 11-5. GPRS Parameters - Min. Qos. Tab

Data Compression Information obtained from service provider.• If provider supports data compression, select

No.• If provider supports data compression, select

Yes.

Header Compression Information obtained from service provider.• If provider supports header compression,

select No.• If provider supports header compression,

select Yes.

Current Active Context Select the number representing the context to use for the connection.

Table 11-1. PDP Context Tab Fields (Continued)


11-8


Note: If the value of the fields is set too high, a connection may not be established.

Table 11-2. Min. Qos. Tab Fields


Precedence Information obtained from service provider.A parameter describing the relative priority of maintaining the service.

Delay Information obtained from service provider.A parameter describing service speed.

Reliability Information obtained from service provider.A parameter indicates the transmission characteristics required by an application. The reliability class defines the probability of loss, duplication, missequencing or corruption of SDU (Service Data Unit).

Peak Information obtained from service provider.A parameter indicating the peak throughput octet rate per second.

Mean Information obtained from service provider.A parameter indicating the mean throughput octet rate per minute.

11-9


4. Tap the Req. Qos. tab and make the appropriate changes, as per Table 11-3.This tab configures the quality of service requested.

Figure 11-6. GPRS Parameters - Req. Qos. Tab

Table 11-3. Req. Qos. Tab Fields




Reliability Information obtained from service provider.A parameter indicates the transmission characteristics required by an application. The reliability class defines the probability of loss, duplication, missequencing or corruption of SDU (Service Data Unit).



11-10


5. Tap ok when all options are selected. 6. You are asked to confirm the change. Tap Yes.7. You are asked if you want to overwrite the default GPRS settings permanently.

• Tap No to apply the new settings to the active parameters settings only. In this case the new parameters are used for all subsequent PDP contexts until a cold boot occurs.

• Tap Yes to overwrite the default settings permanently. In this case a cold boot retains the new settings.

8. Tap ok in the Option Select window. Before setting up a GPRS connection, exit from GSM Demo. To exit, tap File - Exit from the main GSM Demo window. This closes the internal serial port and makes it available for the GPRS connection.

Configuring GPRS Parameters Using the Registry FileThe registry file contains the GPRS parameters for a particular network provider. The entries in this file are read during cold boot and placed with the active registry settings. A default registry file, GPRS.reg, is included on the terminal in the Platform folder. Create a new registry file with your GPRS parameters or edit the existing file.

CautionBefore working with registry files, it is important to understand how they are merged. All registry files in the Platform folder are merged before the reg-istry files in the Applications folder. When there are two or more registry files in the same folder on the terminal, they are merged in alphabetical or-der (by file name) after a cold boot. If a customized registry file is executed before the original registry file, the original file overwrites the customized file. To avoid this, name the file appropriately so it falls alphabetically after the original registry file. For example, if you make changes to the original registry file GPRS.reg and save it as AGPRS.reg, the original GPRS.reg merges after AG-PRS.reg and overwrites the customized registry file.

To configure parameters using the registry file, either:

• create a new registry file• manually update the existing registry file.

11-11


Creating a New Registry File1. Open any text editing application, such as Microsoft Notepad.2. Create the content of the registry file. You can use the sample registry file included

on the terminal as a base for the new file (also included below, see Sample Network Parameter Registry File on page 11-13). To access the file, see To copy the file from the terminal:.

3. Save the file using any name. If using Microsoft Notepad, click File - Save As.

Note: When saving the file, do not change the file type, i.e., save the file as a .reg file only.

4. Load the new file back on to the terminal. See To load the file back on the terminal: on page 11-13.

5. Cold boot the terminal to merge new registry settings. See Performing a Cold Boot on page 2-28.

Manually Updating the Existing Registry FileA default registry file is included on the terminal in the Platform folder. To update this file copy the file from the terminal onto the desktop computer, make the necessary changes and load the new file back onto the terminal.

To copy the file from the terminal:

1. Establish an ActiveSync connection between the desktop computer and the terminal. See Chapter 4, Communications for instructions.

2. In ActiveSync, click Explore. Windows Explorer opens the Mobile Device window for the terminal.

3. Navigate to the Platform folder. 4. Right-click the GPRS.reg file and click Copy. Place the cursor in the desired folder

on the desktop computer, right-click, and click Paste. To make changes to the file:

1. Open the GPRS.reg file downloaded above in any text editor application, such as Microsoft Notepad. You cannot double-click to open the file.

2. Change the values for the parameters, as necessary. Parameter names appear in quotes followed by an = sign (for example, “CurrentContext”=). Only change the text followed by the = sign.

11-12


A sample registry file is included below. See Sample Network Parameter Registry File on page 11-13.

3. Save the file. If using Microsoft Notepad, click File - Save to save it under the current name or click File - Save As to save it under a different name.

Note: When saving the file, do not change the file type, i.e., save the file as a .reg file only.

To load the file back on the terminal:

1. Establish an ActiveSync connection between the desktop computer and the terminal. See Chapter 4, Communications for instructions.

2. In ActiveSync, click Explore. Windows Explorer opens the Mobile Device window for the terminal.

3. Open another Windows Explorer window and browse to the file to copy on the terminal, i.e., the updated or new registry file created.

4. Right-click the file and click Copy. Place the cursor in the Applications folder on the terminal, right-click, and click Paste.

5. Cold boot the terminal to merge new registry settings. See Performing a Cold Boot on page 2-28.

Sample Network Parameter Registry FileThe following sample provides 3 contexts, with one of them the active context. Parameter names appear in quotes followed by an = sign (for example, “CurrentContext”=). Only change the text followed by the = sign.

; --------------------------------------------------------------------

; GPRS Network Specific Parameters

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Drivers\BuiltIn\Seriald3]

"CurrentContext"=dword:1

"Version"="1.0"

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Drivers\BuiltIn\Seriald3\Context1]

;

; 1st of 3 selectable Contexts

;

"ContextID"=dword:1

"ContextName"="VoiceStream"

"PDPType"="IP"

11-13


"APN"="internet3.voicestream.com"

"PDPAddress"=""

"DataCompression"=dword:0

"HDRCompression"=dword:0

"QosMinPrecedence"=dword:0

"QosMinDelay"=dword:0

"QosMinReliability"=dword:3

"QosMinPeak"=dword:0

"QosMinMean"=dword:0

"QosReqPrecedence"=dword:0

"QosReqDelay"=dword:0

"QosReqReliability"=dword:3

"QosReqPeak"=dword:0

"QosReqMean"=dword:0


;

; 2nD of 3 selectable Contexts

;

"ContextID"=dword:2

"ContextName"="Telstra"

"PDPType"="IP"

"APN"="telstra.internet"

"PDPAddress"=""










11-14




"QosReqMean"=dword:0


;

; Last of 3 selectable Contexts

;

"ContextID"=dword:3

"ContextName"="OmniTel"

"PDPType"="IP"

"APN"="web.omnitel.it"

"PDPAddress"=""












"QosReqMean"=dword:1f

11-15


Configuring a GPRS WAN ConnectionTo set up a new connection configuration:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Connections tab - Connections icon.2. In the Connections window, select Add a new modem connection.


3. Enter GPRS as the name for the connection4. Select Virtual GPRS modem on COM9 from the Select a modem: drop-down

menu, then tap Next.

Figure 11-8. Selecting GPRS Connection

11-16






7. The settings in Advanced should not need to be changed. Most ISPs now use a server-assigned address. If the ISP does not use a server-assigned address, tap Advanced.

11-17


a. On the General and Port Settings tabs, select connection settings such as baud rate, data bits, and parity. Dialing options are also available. Tap ok when finished.





11-18


Connecting via GPRS1. Ensure a SIM card is installed in the terminal. See Installing the SIM Card (PPT

2837 Only) on page 1-7.2. Ensure GPRS parameters are configured appropriately. See GPRS Parameters

Configuration on page 11-3.3. Ensure a GPRS WAN connection is properly configured. See Configuring a GPRS

WAN Connection on page 11-16.4. Tap Start - Settings - Connections tab - Connections icon.5. In the Connections window, tap Manage existing connections to use the

connection.


11-19


6. Tap and hold GPRS, then select Connect from the menu that appears.

Figure 11-14. Selecting the GPRS Connection

7. Tap ok. There is no username or password for a GPRS connection.

Note: If the SIM card is protected with a PIN number, a window appears, requesting the appropriate PIN number to unlock the SIM card. In this case, enter the PIN number and tap ok.

The Connecting window displays.

Figure 11-15. Connection Window

11-20


8. Once a connection is established, launch Internet Explorer by tapping Start - Internet Explorer.

9. To end a connection, tap the double arrows on the Navigation bar and tap End.

Establishing a GSM CSD ConnectionTo establish a GSM circuit switched data (CSD) connection:

1. Install GSM Demo.2. Verify the functionality of the SIM card.3. Configure a GSM WAN connection.

Installing the GSM DemoEnsure the GSM Demo application is installed on the terminal. Tap Start - Programs - File Explorer and navigate to the Applications folder. If GSMDemo is not listed, see GSM Demo Installation on page C-1 for installation instructions.

Verifying the Functionality of the SIM Card 1. Ensure a SIM card is installed in the terminal. See Installing the SIM Card (PPT

2837 Only) on page 1-7.2. Ensure that the GSMDemo Application is installed on the terminal. Tap Start -

Programs - File Explorer on the terminal and navigate to the Applications folder. If GSMDemo is not listed, see GSM Demo Installation on page C-1.

3. If GSMDemo is listed, select GSM Demo.As GSM Demo launches, it opens the internal serial port to the GSM modem and attempts to register with a network. The terminal displays the main GSM Demo window.

11-21


Figure 11-16. GSM Demo Main Window

The Network Status field displays the following messages as the modem attempts to connect: Opening GSM com port, Initializing modem, Checking SIM Card and Configuring modem. Once a successful connection is made, the field displays Registered Home or Registered Roam (if out of network).

4. If the Network Status field displays Searching... and a connection is not made:a. Tap Options - Settings - Change Band.

Figure 11-17. GSM Demo Change Band Window

11-22


b. Make the appropriate selection, depending on the location:• Select 1900Mhz for North America• Select 900/1800Mhz for Europe, Asia, Australia and Africa.If necessary, contact the service provider to confirm the band information.

c. Tap Change.d. In the pop-up Confirm window, tap Yes. The terminal displays the main GSM

Demo window, and the Network Status field displays Cycling Power. Restarting. 5. A successful registration, indicated by signal strength (as shown below), ensures

the functionality of the SIM card.

Figure 11-18. GSM Demo Main Window

11-23


Configuring a GSM WAN ConnectionTo set up a new connection configuration:

1. Tap Start - Settings - Connections tab - Connections icon.2. In the Connections window, select Add a new modem connection.


3. Enter GSM as the name for the connection.4. Select Virtual GSM modem on COM8 from the Select a modem: drop-down menu,

then tap Next.

Figure 11-20. Selecting GSM Connection

11-24






7. The settings in Advanced should not need to be changed. Most ISPs now use a server-assigned address. If the ISP does not use a server-assigned address, tap Advanced.

11-25


a. On the General and Port Settings tabs, select connection settings such as baud rate, data bits, and parity. Dialing options are also available. Tap ok when finished.





11-26


Connecting via GSM1. Ensure a SIM card is installed in the terminal. See Installing the SIM Card (PPT

2837 Only) on page 1-7.2. Ensure a GSM WAN connection is properly configured. See Configuring a GSM

WAN Connection on page 11-243. Tap Start - Settings - Connections tab - Connections icon.4. In the Connections window, select the Advanced tab.

Tap Network Card. In the My network card connects to: drop-down, select either The Internet if connecting to the Internet, or Work if connecting to a network.

Figure 11-25. Connections - Advanced Settings

5. Tap OK.

11-27


6. On the Tasks tab, tap Manage existing connections to use the connection.


7. Tap and hold GSM, then select Connect from the menu that appears.

Figure 11-27. Selecting the GSM Connection

8. In the Network Log On window, enter a user name, password, and the domain if required, and tap ok.

Note: If the SIM card is protected with a PIN number, a window requests the appropriate PIN number to unlock the SIM card. In this case, enter the PIN number and tap ok.

11-28


The Connecting window appears.

Figure 11-28. GSM Connection Window

9. Once a connection is established, launch Internet Explorer by tapping Start - Internet Explorer.

10. To end a connection, tap the double arrows on the Navigation bar and tap End.

11-29


11-30

Chapter 12 Software Installation on Development PC

Chapter ContentsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Required System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3SMDK for eVC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4SMDK for eVC4 Contents and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

SMDK for .NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6SMDK for .NET Contents and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6

DCP for PPT 2800w. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7DCP for PPT 2800w Contents and Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

Installing Other Development Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8

12-1


12-2

Software Installation on Development PC

IntroductionTo develop applications to run on the terminal, one or more of the following is required:

• Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for Embedded Visual C 4.0 (eVC4)• Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for .NET• Device Configuration Package (DCP) for PPT 2800w.

The SMDK for eVC4 is a development tool used to create native C and C++ applications for all Symbol terminals running the Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs operating system. It includes documentation, header files (.H), and library files (.LIB) for native code application development that targets Symbol value-add APIs.

The SMDK for .NET provides the tools necessary to develop C# and VB.NET managed applications for Symbol terminals. These tools include class libraries, sample applications, and associated documentation. SMDK for .NET allows Microsoft .NET Compact Framework developers to programmatically access Symbol value-add features of the terminals.

The DCP for PPT 2800w provides the Product Reference Guide (PRG), flash partitions, Terminal Configuration Manager (TCM) and the associated TCM scripts. With this package hex images that represent flash partitions can be created and downloaded to the terminal.

Required System ConfigurationsThe minimum system configuration required to install the SMDK for eVC4, SMDK for .NET and DCP for the PPT 2800w is:

• IBM-compatible host computer with Pentium 450 MHz processor or higher• Microsoft Windows XP or Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system• 128 MB RAM• 100 MB available hard disk space• CD-ROM drive• One available serial port• Mouse• ActiveSync software, available at the Microsoft web site:

http://www.microsoft.com.

12-3

http://www.microsoft.com


SMDK for eVC4

Installation RequirementsBefore installing the SMDK for eVC4, first install the following components on the development PC:

• Microsoft Windows XP or Windows 2000 • Microsoft Embedded Visual C++ v4.0 with SP2• Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 SDK• Microsoft ActiveSync version 3.7 or higher• Adobe® Acrobat® Reader® 3.0 or higher.

SMDK for eVC4 Contents and LocationsThe SMDK for eVC4 contains the components listed in Table 12-1.

Table 12-1. SMDK for eVC4 Contents and Locations

Components Directory Location

API Help file and Readme file

\Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit v1.1 for eVC4\

Sample applications for quick-start development

\Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit v1.1 for eVC4\Samples\evc\

Header files with API prototypes and structures *

\Program Files\Windows CE Tools\wce420\Pocket PC 2003\Include\armv4

Import Library files* \Program Files\Windows CE Tools\wce420\Pocket PC 2003\Lib\armv4

* The header files and lib files are time and date stamped so they can be easily identified in the armv4 directories. The “date” is the date on which the software release was assembled and the time is the version of the release. For example, a time of 1:00 signifies version 1.0.

12-4


Start Menu \Documents and Settings\All Users\Start Menu\Programs

Readme

Help

Samples

WEB Updates

Table 12-1. SMDK for eVC4 Contents and Locations (Continued)


* The header files and lib files are time and date stamped so they can be easily identified in the armv4 directories. The “date” is the date on which the software release was assembled and the time is the version of the release. For example, a time of 1:00 signifies version 1.0.

12-5


SMDK for .NET

Installation RequirementsIn order to install the SMDK for .NET, the following additional components must first be installed on the development PC:

• Remove any SMDK for .NET (Beta 1 or Beta 2) packages prior to installation. • Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2003.

SMDK for .NET Contents and LocationsThe SMDK for .NET contains the components listed in Table 12-2.

Table 12-2. SMDK for .NET Contents and Location


Class library assemblies

\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio .NET 2003\CompactFrameworkSDK\v1.0.5000\Windows CE

Forms source code \Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for .NET\v1.1\Windows CE\Source

Sample applications \Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for .NET\v1.1\Windows CE\Samples

Help files \Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for .NET\v1.1\Windows CE\Help Files

Updates to native drivers

\Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for .NET\v1.1\Windows CE\DriverUpdates

CAB files \Program Files\Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for .NET\v1.1\Windows CE\MassDeployment

12-6


DCP for PPT 2800w

Installation RequirementsThe DCP for PPT 2800w has no additional installation requirements.

DCP for PPT 2800w Contents and LocationsThe DCP for PPT 2800w contains the components listed in Table 12-3.

Table 12-3. DCP Contents and Locations


Files that make up the flash partitions

Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\PPT2800w \v1.0\Flash Folders

File used to create terminal splash screen

\Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\PPT2800w \v1.0\Flash Folders\Splash

Hex image - default location

\Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\PPT2800w \v1.0\Hex Images


\Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\PPT2800w \v1.0

Readme \Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\PPT2800w \v1.0

Scripts used to customize flash partitions

\Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\PPT2800w \v1.0\TCM Scripts

Terminal Configuration Manager (TCM)

Program Files\Symbol\TCM

Tools (ex Keyboard remap, if any)

\Program Files\Symbol Device Configurations package\PPT2800w \v1.0\Tools\kbtool

12-7


The SMDK for eVC4, SMDK for .NET and DCP for PPT 2800w are available from the Symbol Developer’s Zone web site, http://devzone.symbol.com.

Installing Other Development SoftwareDeveloping applications for the terminal may require installing other development software such as application development environments on the development PC. Follow the installation instructions provided with this software.

Start Menu \Documents and Settings\All Users\Start Menu\Programs

Readme

PRG

TCM

WEB Updates

Table 12-3. DCP Contents and Locations (Continued)


12-8


Chapter 13 Configuring the Terminal

Chapter ContentsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3Starting Terminal Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Defining Script Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7Creating the Script for the Hex Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Opening a New or Existing Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9Updating TCM 1.X Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9Copying Components to the Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9Saving the Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Building the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10Sending the Hex Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Saving the Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11Setting Up IPL to Receive the File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

IPL Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16TCM Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18Creating a Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Creating a Splash Screen on Color Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20Creating a Splash Screen on Monochrome Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Flash Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21FFS Partitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21Working with FFS Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21Non-FFS Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23Downloading Partitions to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24

IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24Partition Update vs. File Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24Upgrade Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25

13-1


13-2

Configuring the Terminal

Introduction

Terminal Configuration Manager (TCM) is an application that resides on the desktop computer, and is used to customize flash file system partitions for the terminal. The most common use is to create an application partition hex file that contains the customer's application. TCM can also be used to load hex files to the flash memory of the terminal.

The Initial Program Loader (IPL) program resides on the terminal and receives the hex file and burns it to the flash memory.

TCM scripts control the customization of partitions. The scripts contain all of the necessary information for building an image. The script is a list of copy commands specifying the files to copy from the development computer to the partition.

TCM works with a pair of directory windows, one displaying the script and the other displaying the source files resident on the development computer. Using standard windows drag and drop operations, files can be added and deleted from the script window.

The DCP for the PPT 2800 includes scripts used by Symbol Technologies to build the standard factory installed Platform and Application partitions provided on the terminal. The standard Platform partition contains drivers; the Application partition contains demo applications and optional components. The standard TCM scripts can be found in the following folder: c:\Program Files\Symbol Device Configuration Packages\PPT2800w\v1.0\TCM Scripts

Note: Before creating a script to build a hex image, identify the files required (system files, drivers, applications, etc.) and locate the files’ source directories to simplify the script building process.

The required processes for building a hex image in TCM include:

• Starting TCM• Defining script properties• Creating the script for the hex image• Building the image• Sending the hex image• Creating a splash screen• Flash storage.

13-3


Starting Terminal Configuration ManagerOn the desktop computer, click the Windows start menu TCM icon to start TCM. The TCM window appears displaying two child windows: Script1 and File Explorer. The Script1 window contains a newly created script and the File Explorer window contains a file explorer view used for selecting files to be placed in the script.

Figure 13-1. Sample TCM Startup Window

13-4


The following table lists the components of the TCM window.

Table 13-1. TCM Components

Icon Component Function

Script Window Display the files to be used in the creation of the partition(s).

File Explorer Window Used to select the files to be added to the script.

Create button Create a new script file.

Open button Open an existing script file.

Save button Save the current script file.

Large icons button View the current script items as large icon.

Small icons button View the current script items as small icon.

List button View the current script items as a list.

Details button View the current script items with more details.

13-5


About button Display version information for TCM.

Properties button View/change the current script properties.

Build button Build the current script into a set of hex files.

Check button Check the script for errors (files not found).

Send button Download the hex image to the terminal.

Tile button Arrange the sub-windows in a tiled orientation.

Build and Send Build the current script into a set of hex images and send the hex images to the terminal.

Preferences button View/change the global TCM options.

Table 13-1. TCM Components (continued)

Icon Component Function

13-6


Defining Script PropertiesBefore a script is created, define the script properties, i.e., the type of terminal, flash type, number of disks being created and the memory configuration of each disk partition.

To define the script properties:

1. Select the Script window to make it active.2. Click the Properties button. The Script Properties window - Partition Data tab

appears.

Figure 13-2. Sample Script Properties Window - Partition Data Tab

3. In the Terminal drop-down list, the 2800_2003 entry is already selected.4. Use the default Flash Type.5. In the Disks drop-down list, select the number of disk partitions to create.6. Select the (memory) Size for each partition. Note that adding space to one disk

partition subtracts it from another.7. In the Access drop-down list for each disk partition, determine and select the Read/

Write access option.

13-7


8. Click the Options tab. The Script Properties window - Options tab appears.

Figure 13-3. Sample Script Properties Window - Options Tab

9. Set the paths for the Script File, Flash File and Hex File Build.10. Click ok.

Creating the Script for the Hex ImageOn start-up, TCM displays the TCM window with the Script1 window and File Explorer window pointing to the following directory:

Symbol Windows CE SDK(xxxx)\SymbolPlatforms\PPTxxxx\TCMScripts

The Script1 window directory pane displays two partitions: Platform and Application. Depending on the type of flash chip, the number of partitions can change. Files can be added to each of the partitions. TCM functionality includes:

• Opening a new or existing script file• Copying components to the script window• Saving the script file.

13-8


Opening a New or Existing ScriptA script file can be created from scratch or based on an existing script file. Click Create to create a new script or click Open to open an existing script (for example, a script provided in the DCP for PPT 2800). If you open an existing script and make changes, saving the changes overwrites the original script. To use an original or Symbol supplied standard script as a base and save the changes in a new script, use the Save As function to save the script using a different file name.

Updating TCM 1.X ScriptsScript files created with older versions of TCM can be upgraded to TCM 2.0 scripts. Click Open to open an existing script created with an older version of TCM. The Conversion window appears automatically.

Figure 13-4. Sample Conversion Window - Upgrading to TCM 2.0

Copying Components to the ScriptScript contents are managed using standard file operations such as New Folder, Delete and Rename. To add items to the script, click files and folders in the File Explorer window and drag them to the Script window. The File Explorer window supports standard windows; to select multiple files click while holding the SHIFT or CTRL keys.

Saving the ScriptSave modifications to a script file using the Save or the Save As function. Saving changes to an existing script overwrites the original script. To use a Symbol-supplied standard script as a base and save the changes in a new script, use the Save As function.

13-9


Building the ImageAfter creating the script, build the hex image defined by the script.

As part of the build, TCM performs a check on the script which verifies that all files referenced in the script exist. This check is important for previously created scripts to ensure that files referenced in the script are still in the designated locations.

To build scripts:

1. Click Build on the TCM toolbar. The Configure Build window appears.

Figure 13-5. Sample Configure Build Window

2. Select the items (partitions) to build using the check box(es) to the left of each named partition.

3. The Build Path defines where to store all built partitions.4. Select (hex image) COMPRESSION to reduce the size and speed up the

download.5. Click ok and follow the on-screen instructions.

If one of the partitions being built is the Splash Screen, a prompt appears requesting both the source Bitmap file and the destination HEX file.

A check is performed and if there are no errors, the partition hex files are created.

If the build fails, the hex files are not created and TCM displays an error message. Two of the most common reasons for a build failure are:

13-10


• Files defined in the script can not be found. This error can occur when the files referenced by the script are no longer stored on the development computer or the folders where they are stored were renamed.

• The total amount of flash memory space required by the script exceeds the image size. To correct this, reduce the number of files in the partition or increase the size of the partition. See Defining Script Properties on page 13-7 for more information about setting the image size appropriately.

Sending the Hex ImageOnce the hex file is built, download it to the terminal. This requires both TCM and a program loader stored on the terminal. The terminal comes with a program loading utility, Initial Program Loader (IPL), stored in the terminal’s write-protected flash. To run IPL, the terminal must be inserted in a cradle or connected to a development PC by direct serial connection.

Saving the ScriptIf you made changes to the script since last saving it, save the script again.

13-11


Setting Up IPL to Receive the FileTo set up IPL on the terminal to receive the files being downloaded via TCM:

1. Cold boot the terminal by pressing the reset button inside the battery compartment while holding down the Function button.

2. Press and hold any Trigger (Scan) button, then press and hold the battery door switch inside the battery compartment (on the left). This all must occur within 3 seconds after resetting the terminal.

3. Continue to hold the Trigger (Scan) button, including the battery door switch, until the IPL Baud Rate menu displays.

If necessary, adjust the contrast (see Controlling the Contrast/Backlight on page 2-3).

4. The version number on the top of the screen identifies the IPL version. After the version number one of the following messages appears, indicating why IPL was invoked:• IPL Key Sequence: IPL key sequence was pressed.• Partition Table not found: indicates no partition table was found.• Partition Table Checksum Error: indicates a checksum error was detected in the

partition table.Use the up and down scroll buttons on the terminal to scroll to the appropriate baud rate, then press the Action button to accept the selected baud rate. If no selection is made within 10 seconds, 115,200 is automatically selected.

IPL VER X.XXIPL Key Sequence

-> 115,20057,60038,40019,2009600Auto Baud

Press Up/Down to select Baud Rate

Action to Continue

13-12


5. IPL displays the Main Menu which lists the partitions/applications that can be downloaded.

6. Use the up and down scroll buttons to select the partition to be received, then press the Action button, or select Auto Select to download several partitions in sequence.

Note: Auto Select is the default, and is selected if no other selection is made within 10 seconds.

If updating the IPL hex image or partition table hex image, you MUST reboot the terminal into IPL after downloading the image before other images can be downloaded.

If the platform application or data partition sizes are changed, download a new partition table first.

IPL Ver X.XXIPL Key Sequence

Windows CEPlatformApplicationDataSplash ScreenIPLPartition TableAuto Select

Press Up/Down toselect partition

Press Action to begin download

13-13


7. The following screen displays:

Partition Name reflects the selection made on the Main Menu, and Baud Rate XXX,XXX displays the selection chosen from the baud rate menu.

This screen continues to display until the first character of the image to be downloaded is received from the host. While this screen is displayed, pressing the Action button returns IPL to the Main Menu screen.

8. Insert the terminal in a cradle, or connect it to a host PC with a serial cable.9. On the development computer, click Load on the TCM toolbar. The Load Terminal

window - Serial tab appears.

Figure 13-6. Sample Load Terminal Window - Serial Tab

10. Click the Serial tab and select the Image Files To Load, Comm Port and Baud Rate from their respective drop-down lists.

11. Click Download to begin the operation.

IPL VER X.XX

Partition Name

Waiting for Dataat Baud Rate XXX,XXX

Press Action toreturn to Main Menu

13-14


12. As soon as the first character of data is received, IPL displays the receiving screen:

Note: If the Pre-erase Attribute bit is set on the partition being downloaded, the message “Pre-Erasing Flash” also appears.

This screen indicates that the area selected in the Main Menu screen is currently downloading, and displays until an entire image is received, or until an error is detected. As more data is received, the Receiving Screen is updated to reflect the current status.

To process the data, IPL must receive, erase, and write the entire image. With the exception of the disk images, IPL receives the entire image before starting the erase, and completes the erase before starting to write. With disk images, IPL multiplexes all three operations as data is received.

13. When the entire image is received, IPL indicates that the download is complete.

If Auto Select was selected on the Main Menu, the text Auto Select Enabled appears in place of Cold Boot Exits IPL.

14. If Auto Select was selected on the Main Menu, IPL immediately returns to the Waiting for Data screen to wait for the next image. If any other selection was made on the Main Menu, IPL stays at the success screen until you press Action. Once the screen is acknowledged, IPL returns to the Main Menu to wait for a new selection.

IPL VER X.XX

Partition NameDownloading Data

Processing XXXXX KB of YYYYY KB image

IPL VER X.XX

Partition NameDownload Complete


Cold Boot Exits IPL

13-15


15. When all partitions are downloaded successfully, cold boot the terminal by pressing the reset button inside the battery compartment while holding down the Function button.

IPL Error MessagesWhile receiving data, IPL performs many checks on the data to ensure that the data is received correctly. If an error is detected, IPL immediately aborts the download, and reports the error on an error screen:

This screen displays until you press Action. Once the screen is acknowledged, IPL returns to the Main Menu screen to wait for a new selection.

The cause of the error displays under the Download Failed! indication. The errors that can be reported, and the probable cause of the error, are as follows:

Error Description

Invalid Image This error occurs if another record is received before the Header Record. Ensure the Header Record is the first record downloaded.

Partition Not Defined The destination code is part of the Header record and is used as an index into the partition table. The partition table entry located at this index contains partition information for the data downloaded. If the AutoSelect option is selected, a check is made to ensure that valid partition information exists in the partition table at this index. The check verifies that the Area Name and Sector Size are both non-zero. If not, this error occurs.

Wrong Partition If a specific partition is selected from the partition list, and the destination code of the Header record downloaded does not match the index of that partition, this error occurs.

Image Too Big The size of the image is also part of the Header record. If the data to be written exceeds the size of the partition as indicated in the partition table, this error occurs.

IPL VER X.XX

Download Failed!Error Condition


13-16


Incorrect Byte Count Image data is processed until the End Of File (EOF - Record Type 01) record is received. This error occurs if IPL detects that the number of bytes received does not equal the number of bytes sent.

Unable to Verify Partition Data

If the Receive and Verify bit is set for that partition, the data is verified, the flash sector erased, and the data written to the flash part. If this data can not be verified, this error occurs.

Transmission Errors The following error messages may appear if an error occurs during transmission:Checksum Error occurs if an invalid checksum is detected in the record.Invalid Record occurs if a record is not defined in the Symbol Hex File Format.Connection Lost occurs if one of the handshaking lines is de-asserted during download.Address Out of Sequence occurs if the address of the data received is not sequential.

Error Description

13-17


TCM Error MessagesTCM validates the cells in the partition table when you click the Execute button. Cells highlighted in red contain an error. Partition loading is disabled until all errors are corrected.

Table 13-2. TCM Error Messages

Error Description/Solution

Failed to build images: flash file system DLL not loaded!

TCM could not load the DLL required to build images for the targeting flash file system. Reinstall TCM or recover the DLL.

Failure finding directory xxx Building process failed because directory xxx was not found.

Failure creating volume Building process failed because a certain disk volume could not be created.

Failure adding system file to image

Build process failed because TCM failed to add a certain system file to the disk image.

INVALID PATH The path for the image file to build is not valid.

Nothing Selected To Build In the Config Build window, no item is selected to build.

Illegal ESS ID In the Build ESSID Partition window, no ESS ID was entered or the ESS ID entered was illegal.

Disk Full TCM failed to create Hex image file at the selected path. Check available disk space.

Target Disk Full Build process failed because TCM failed to add file to the image of a disk volume. Remove some files or increase the disk size.

Hex file is READ ONLY The Hex image file to be created exists and is read-only. Delete the existing file or change its attribute.

Error opening the file xxx with write access

TCM could not open file xxx with write access. Check if file is in use.

Failure creating binary file TCM failed to open/create an intermediate binary file.

Hex File To load is missing or invalid

In Load Terminal window, the file selected to load has invalid status.

Could not locate terminal name in TCM.ini file

While loading the Script Properties window, TCM could not find the TCM.ini section corresponding to the terminal type specified by the current opening script. Either TCM.ini or the script file is invalid.

13-18


Incorrect disk sizes in TCM.ini file

The total disk size specified in the script does not match the total disk size defined in the corresponding TCM.ini section. Check if the script is corrupt or the TCM.ini has changed after the script was created.

INVALID DIRECTORY In Script Properties window, the selected System File Path is not a valid directory.

One of the disk sizes is one sector in size

In Script Properties window, one of the disks is too small (one sector in size). This may cause problem while building images, especially when cushion is enabled. Increase the disk size.

INVALID VOLUME NAME In Script Properties window, one of the volume labels is not valid.

Corrupt TCM.INI file! (Invalid value of VolumeDivisor)

The VolumeDivisor entry is missing or invalid in the TCM.ini. Reinstall TCM or recover TCM.ini.

Invalid version of TCM script file

The TCM script was not created by this version of TCM.

Corrupt or missing TCM.ini file

TCM could not find TCM.ini file.

FAILED CONNECTION TO COM PORT (Could not get status)

While downloading images to terminal, TCM failed to connect to the selected COM port. Check if the COM port is free and is properly configured.

FAILED CONNECTION TO TERMINAL (Terminal Not Connected Properly/Terminal Not Ready to Receive)

While downloading images, TCM failed to connect to the terminal. Check if the correct flow control protocol is selected and the terminal is properly connected and is in a listening state.

Table 13-2. TCM Error Messages (continued)

Error Description/Solution

13-19


Creating a Splash ScreenTo generate a custom splash screen, use a bitmap editor, such as Paintbrush.

Creating a Splash Screen on Color Terminals1. Create a color bitmap with dimensions of BX x BY where:

• BX is less than or equal to 240 pixels• BY is less than or equal to 320 pixels

2. For best quality, use a relatively high resolution color image (for example, 16-bit color). Lower resolution images will also work.

3. Save the file as a 24-bit .bmp bitmap.

Creating a Splash Screen on Monochrome Terminals1. Create a 16-color bitmap with dimensions of BX x BY where:

• BX is less than or equal to 240 pixels• BY is less than or equal to 320 pixels

2. Be sure to create the file with 16 colors where 4 bits are used for each pixel of data in the file. IPL will not load if the number of bits of data for each pixel (bpp) is not correct.

3. Save the file as a 4-bit, 16-color .bmp bitmap.See Sending the Hex Image on page 13-11 for information about loading the splash screen.

13-20


Flash StorageIn addition to the RAM-based storage standard on Windows CE terminals, the terminal is also equipped with a non-volatile Flash-based storage area which can store data (partitions) that can not be corrupted by a cold boot. This Flash area is divided into two categories: Flash File System (FFS) Partitions and Non-FFS Partitions.

FFS PartitionsThe terminal includes two FFS partitions. These partitions appear to the terminal as a hard drive that the OS file system can write files to and read files from. Data is retained even if power is removed.

The two FFS partitions appear as two separate folders in the Windows CE file system and are as follows:

• Platform: The Platform FFS partition contains Symbol-supplied programs and Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs). This FFS is configured to include DLLs that control system operation. Since these drivers are required for basic terminal operation, only experienced users should modify the content of this partition.

• Application: The Application FFS partition is used to store application programs needed to operate the terminal.

Working with FFS PartitionsBecause the FFS partitions appear as folders under the Windows CE file system, they can be written to and read like any other folder. For example, an application program can write data to a file located in the Application folder just as it would to the Windows folder. However, the file in the Application folder is in non-volatile storage and is not lost on a cold boot (e.g., when power is removed for a long period of time).

Standard tools such as ActiveSync can be used to copy files to and from the FFS partitions. They appear as the Application and Platform folders to the ActiveSync explorer. This is useful when installing applications on the terminal. Applications stored in the Application folder are retained even when the terminal is cold booted, just as the demo program is retained in memory.

There are two device drivers included in the Windows CE image to assist developers in configuring the terminal following a cold boot: RegMerge and CopyFiles.

13-21


RegMerge.dllRegMerge.dll is a built-in driver that allows registry edits to be made to the Windows CE Registry. Regmerge.dll runs very early in the boot process and looks for registry files (.reg files) in certain Flash File System folders during a cold boot. It then merges the registry changes into the system registry located in RAM.

Since the registry is re-created on every cold boot from the default ROM image, the RegMerge driver is necessary to make registry modifications persistent over cold boots.

RegMerge is configured to look in the root of two specific folders for .reg files in the following order:

\Platform\Application

Regmerge continues to look for .reg files in these folders until all folders are checked. This allows folders later in the list to override folders earlier in the list. This way, it is possible to override Registry changes made by the Platforms partitions folders. Take care when using Regmerge to make Registry changes. The DCP for PPT 2800 contains examples of .reg files.

Note: Regmerge only merges the .reg files on cold boots. The merge process is skipped during a warm boot.

Typically, do not make modifications to registry values for drivers loaded before RegMerge. However, these values may require modification during software development. Since these early loading drivers read these keys before RegMerge gets a chance to change them, the terminal must be cold booted. The warm boot does not re-initialize the registry and the early loading driver reads the new registry values.

Do not use Regmerge to modify built-in driver registry values, or merge the same Registry value to two files in the same folder, as the results are undefined.

CopyFilesWindows CE expects certain files to be in the Windows folder, residing in volatile storage. Windows CE maintains the System Registry in volatile storage. CopyFiles copies files from one folder to another on a cold boot. Files can be copied from a non-volatile partition (Application or Platform) to the Windows or other volatile partition during a cold boot. During a cold boot CopyFiles looks for files with a .CPY extension in the root of the Platform and Application FFS partitions (Platform first and then Application). These files are text files

13-22


containing the source and destination for the desired files to be copied separated by “>”. The following example from the file application.cpy is contained on the demo application partition included in the DCP for PPT 2800. It can also be obtained from the Symbol web site at http://devzone.symbol.com/.

Files are copied to the Windows folder from the Flash File System using copy files (*.cpy) in the following order:

\Platform\Application

Example:

\Application\ScanSamp2.exe>\Windows\ScanSamp2.exeThis line directs CopyFiles to copy the ScanSamp2.exe application from the \Application folder to the \Windows folder.

Non-FFS PartitionsNon-FFS Partitions include additional software and data pre-loaded on the terminal that can be upgraded. Unlike FFS Partitions, these partitions are not visible when the operating system is running. They also contain system information. Non-FFS partitions include the following:

• Windows CE: The complete Windows CE operating system is stored on Flash devices. If necessary, the entire OS image can be downloaded to the terminal using files provided by Symbol. The current OS partition on the terminal is included as part of the TCM installation package. Any upgrades must be obtained from Symbol. This partition is mandatory for the terminal.

• Splash Screen: a bitmap smaller than 16 Kb (and limited to 8 bits per pixel) is displayed as the terminal cold boots. To download a customized screen to display, see Creating a Splash Screen on page 13-20.

Note: 8 bits per pixel only applies to splash screen images. Once Windows CE is running, the color density is 16 bits per pixel.

• IPL: This program interfaces with the host computer and allows downloading via cradle or serial cable any or all of the partitions listed above, as well as updated versions of IPL. Use caution downloading updated IPL versions; incorrect downloading of an IPL causes permanent damage to the terminal. IPL is mandatory for the terminal.

13-23

http://devzone.symbol.com/


• Partition Table: Identifies where each partition is loaded in the terminal.

Downloading Partitions to the TerminalTCM is used to specify a hex destination file for each partition and download each file to the terminal. This download requires a program loader stored on the terminal. The terminal comes with a program loading utility, Initial Program Loader (IPL), stored in the terminal's write-protected flash.

IPLIPL allows you to upgrade the terminal with software updates and/or feature enhancements.

Partition Update vs. File UpdateThere are two types of updates supported by the terminal: partitions and files. The file system used by the terminal is the same as the file system used on a desktop computer. A file is a unit of data that can be accessed using a file name and a location in the file system. When a file is replaced, only the contents of the previous file are erased. The operating system must be running for a file to be updated, so the IPL cannot perform individual file updates as it is a stand-alone program that does not require the operating system to be running.

A typical partition is a group of files, combined into a single “partition” that represents a specific area of storage. Examples of partitions are the flash file systems such as Platform or Application. (Using the desktop computer comparison, these partitions are roughly equivalent to a C: or D: hard disk drive.) In addition to the “hard disk” partitions, some partitions are used for single items such as the operating system, monitor, or splash screen. (Again using a desktop computer comparison, these partitions are roughly the equivalent of the BIOS or special hidden system files.) When a partition is updated, all data that was previously in its storage region is erased, i.e., it is not a merge but rather a replacement operation. Typically, the operating system is not running when partitions are update, so IPL can perform partition updates.

TCM can create partition images for selected partitions. All partition images suitable for use by IPL are in hex file format for transfer by TCM from the development computer to the terminal.

13-24


Upgrade RequirementsUpgrade requirements:

• The hex files to be downloaded (on the development computer)• A connection from the host computer and the terminal (either serial or wireless)• TCM (on the development computer) to download the files.

Once these requirements are satisfied, invoke IPL and navigate the menus to upgrade the terminal. See Sending the Hex Image on page 13-11 for procedures on downloading a hex file to the terminal.

13-25


13-26

Chapter 14 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Chapter ContentsIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Safely Maintaining the PPT 2800. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Terminal and Cradle Connector Cleaning Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Cleaning the Terminal Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Cleaning the Cradle Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10

14-1


14-2

Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Introduction

This chapter includes instructions on cleaning and storing the terminal, and provides troubleshooting solutions for potential problems during terminal operating.

Safely Maintaining the PPT 2800For trouble-free service, observe the following tips when using the PPT 2800:

• Take care not to scratch the screen of the PPT 2800. When working with the PPT 2800, use the supplied stylus or plastic-tipped pens intended for use with a touch-sensitive screen. Never use a pen or pencil or other sharp object on the surface of the PPT 2800 screen.

• Although the PPT 2800 is water and dust resistant, do not expose it to rain or moisture for an extended period of time. In general, treat the PPT 2800 as you would a pocket calculator or other small electronic instrument.

• The touch-sensitive screen of the PPT 2800 is glass. Do not drop the PPT 2800 or subject it to strong impact.

• Protect the PPT 2800 from temperature extremes. Do not leave it on the dashboard of a car on a hot day, and keep it away from heat sources.

• Do not store or use the PPT 2800 in any location that is extremely dusty, damp or wet.

• Use a soft lens cloth to clean the PPT 2800. If the surface of the PPT 2800 screen becomes soiled, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with a diluted window-cleaning solution. (See Terminal and Cradle Connector Cleaning Guidelines on page 14-4 for additional information about cleaning the terminal and cradle connectors.)

WARNING

Avoid exposing the PPT 2800, including its cradle, to con-tact with hot oil or other flammable liquids. If such exposure occurs, immediately clean the terminal (or cradle) in accor-dance with the cleaning guidelines at the end of this guide.

14-3


Terminal and Cradle Connector Cleaning GuidelinesThis section explains the proper way to clean the connector area of the PPT 2800 terminal and cradle.

Required MaterialsUse the following cleaning materials:

• Cotton tipped applicators (Puritan)• Isopropyl alcohol• Can of compressed air with a tube/nozzle (Micro Blast)• Lint free cloth.

WARNING

Read the warning label on compressed air and alcohol products before using and ALWAYS wear eye protection.

Cleaning the Terminal ConnectorTo clean the terminal connector, follow the steps below.

1. Remove the main battery from the terminal.2. Replace the battery cover (see Installing Batteries on page 1-8).3. Dip the cotton portion of the cotton tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol.

14-4


4. Insert the cotton portion of the cotton tipped applicator inside the connector on the bottom of the terminal as shown in Figure 14-1. (Ensure the tip of the cotton touches the back of the connector.)

Figure 14-1. Inserting the Cotton Tipped Applicator

5. Twist the cotton tipped applicator and slowly move it back-and-forth from one side of the connector to the other.

Figure 14-2. Cleaning the Connector

6. Repeat step 5 at least three times.7. Remove the cotton tipped applicator from the connector.

Note: The cotton tipped applicator dipped in alcohol can also be used to scrub off any grease and dirt near the connector area.

8. Using a dry cotton tipped applicator, repeat steps 3-5.

14-5


9. Spray compressed air in the connector area by pointing the tube/nozzle approximately 1/2 inch away from the surface.

Figure 14-3. Air Spray Terminal Connector

WARNING

Do not point the tube/nozzle at yourself and others. Ensure the tube or nozzle is away from your face.

10. Inspect the area for any grease or dirt.11. Repeat steps 3-9 as required.12. Ensure there is no lint left by the cotton tipped applicator.13. Remove lint, if found.

1/2"

14-6


Cleaning the Cradle ConnectorTo clean the cradle connector, follow the steps below.

1. Remove the power to the cradle by unplugging the DC cable.2. Position the cradle as shown in Figure 14-4.

Figure 14-4. Preparing the Cradle

3. Dip the cotton portion of the cotton tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol.4. Scrub the cotton portion of the cotton tipped applicator along the pins as shown in

Figure 14-5, slowly moving back-and-forth from one side of the connector to the other.

Figure 14-5. Cleaning the Cradle Connector Pins

14-7


5. All sides of the connector should also be scrubbed with the cotton tipped applicator, illustrated by the arrows in Figure 14-6.

Figure 14-6. Cleaning the Cradle Connector

6. Spray compressed air in the connector area by pointing the tube/nozzle approximately 1/2 inch away from the surface.

Figure 14-7. Air Spray Cradle Connector

WARNING

Do not point the tube/nozzle at yourself and others. Ensure the tube or nozzle is away from your face.

7. Ensure there is no lint left by the cotton tipped applicator.8. Remove lint, if found.

14-8


9. If grease and other dirt is found on other areas of the cradle, use a lint free cloth and alcohol to remove.

10. Allow at least 10-30 minutes (depending on ambient temperature/humidity) for the alcohol to air dry before apply power to cradle.

Note: If temperature is low and humidity is high, longer drying time is needed. Warm and dry requires less drying time. DO NOT PLACE PRODUCTS IN AN OVEN OR UNDER HEAT LAMPS!

WARNING

Avoid exposing this product to contact with hot oil or other flammable liquids. If such exposure occurs, unplug the unit and clean the product immediately in accordance with these guidelines.

14-9


TroubleshootingTable 14-1. Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Solution

PPT 2800 terminal does not turn on.

Adjust the contrast/backlight.Make sure batteries are installed properly.Replace the batteries. If the PPT 2800 terminal still does not operate, try a soft reset; see Resetting the PPT 2800 Terminal on page 2-27.

PPT 2800 does not emit sound. Check the System Volume slider in the Sounds & Notifications properties window (under Start - Settings) to make sure the volume is not turned down.

PPT 2800 turns itself off. The PPT 2800 terminal is designed to turn itself off after a period of inactivity. This period can be set from one to five minutes, in one-minute intervals. Check the Power window (in Start - Settings - System tab), and change the setting if you need a longer delay before the automatic shutoff feature activates.

PPT 2800 stops responding to screen input.

Perform a soft reset. See Resetting the PPT 2800 Terminal on page 2-27.

PPT 2800 responds inaccurately to stylus taps.

Align the screen. Select Start - Settings - System tab - Align Screen, or hold down the Function button and press the Action button.

PPT 2800 doesn’t recognize my handwriting.

If using the Block Recognizer input method, characters must be written a certain way. See Appendix A, Block Recognizer Characters for information about how to write character strokes.Make the character strokes in the lower character entry area on the screen — not on the display part of the screen.Make sure to write lower-case letters, upper-case letters, and numbers in the appropriate sections of the writing area. See Entering Information Using the Input Panel on page 2-16.

Tapping the screen buttons or icons does not activate the corresponding feature.

Align the screen. Choose Start - Settings - System tab - Align Screen, or hold down the Function button and press the Action button.

14-10


A message appears stating that the PPT 2800 terminal memory is full.

Delete unused memos and records. If necessary, save these records on the computer.If copying files to the terminal, adjust the memory allocation. Select Start - Settings - System tab - Memory and adjust the slider.Remove programs no longer used. Select Start - Settings - System tab - Remove Programs, select the unused program and tap Remove.

PPT 2800 is not communicating with the desktop PC.

Ensure the PPT 2800 is connected to the desktop PC via serial cable, or is placed in a cradle connected to the desktop PC.Confirm that the PPT 2800 and desktop PC are communicating at the same baud rate.Consult ActiveSync Help on the desktop PC.

Beamed data does not transmit. Confirm that the terminals are 5” apart, and that the path between the two devices is clear of obstacles. Adjust the room lighting or move to a different location.

When receiving beamed data an out of memory message appears.

The PPT 2800 terminal requires at least twice the amount of memory available as the data you are receiving. For example, if receiving a 30K application, have at least 60K available.

The PPT 2800 does not accept scan input.

Verify that the terminal is loaded with a scanning application. See the System Administrator. Check to be sure the bar code symbol is not defaced. Stay within the proper scanning range.Be sure the terminal is programmed to accept the type of bar code you are scanning. If you are expecting a beep on a good decode and don’t hear one, check that the application is set to generate a beep on good decode.If the PPT 2800 stops emitting a laser beam when you press the trigger, check the battery level. When the battery is low, the scanner shuts off before the terminal notifies you of the very low battery condition.

Table 14-1. Troubleshooting (continued)


14-11


Note: If, after performing these checks, the terminal is still not reading symbols, contact the distributor or Symbol Technologies.

The PPT 2800 is not dialing out. Ensure the modem is connected to the terminal and the telephone jack.Verify the phone jack is connected to a working outside line.Ensure you have set the modem up properly (see Chapter 9, Connections).

The PPT 2800 is dialing but not connecting.

Ensure the network you are calling supports Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) Ask the networking administrator.Ensure the location is correct. Select Start - Settings - Connections tab - Connections. Tap Dialing Locations and verify the settings are correct for the current location. Tap Dialing Patterns to make sure the correct patterns are being dialed.Verify that the number is correct. Check the Connecting dial-out screen.Confirm the host modem is receiving a call when you dial out.Ensure you have set the modem up properly (see Chapter 9, Connections).

Table 14-1. Troubleshooting (continued)


14-12

Appendix ABlock Recognizer Characters

Use the Block Recognizer to write characters directly on the terminal screen with the stylus. These characters are translated into typed text. Use Block Recognizer to enter text, for example, to write a note or to fill in fields in a window.

Figure A-2 provides examples of how to write characters in lowercase. The Block Recognizer input panel is divided into two writing areas. Letters written in the left area (labeled abc) create lowercase letters. Use the right area (labeled 123) for writing numbers, symbols, special characters, and punctuation.

Figure A-1. Using Block Recognizer

A-1


The following chart illustrates some of the characters (the dot on each character is the starting point for writing).

Figure A-2. Character Chart

For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer, with Block Recognizer open, tap the question mark next to the writing area.

A-2

Appendix BDemo Program

IntroductionThe PPT 2800’s demo program illustrates how to use some of the terminal’s many applications. If the demo program is not already on the PPT 2800 (check the Start menu), download the program from the Symbol Mobility Developer Kit (SMDK) for eVC4. See Chapter 3, Customizing the PPT 2800 for instructions on adding programs to the terminal.

The following options are available via the demo program, and are described in this chapter.

• Utilities accesses the Control Panel and Diagnostics.• Sample scanning applications for Visual C/C++, Visual Basic, and Pocket Internet

Explorer.• File Explorer file management utility.• Sample MagStripe reader application.• CE Apps accesses standard Microsoft Windows CE applications.• Audio sample application demonstrates how to record, play back, and save audio

files.• ImageViewer application illustrates how to manipulate displayed image files.

B-1


To initiate the demo program, select Start - PPT 2800 Demo. The initial demo program window appears.

Figure B-1. Main Demo Window

B-2

Demo Program

Scan Demo (VC Scan)The Visual C/C++ sample scanning application enables the terminal’s scanner, allows the user to change scan parameters, and displays scanned data. To access the demo, tap VC Scan on the main demo window.

Figure B-2. Scan Sample Window

Scanning Data FieldsAfter a bar code is scanned, the following data appears in the screen:

• Data displays the data encoded in the scanned bar code.• Type indicates the hex type scanned.• SRC indicates the scanner being used, and the bar code type scanned

(e.g., Code 128).• Time displays the time the bar code was scanned.• Len indicates the number of digits in the bar code.• Evt indicates the status of the scan demo.

B-3


Scanning OptionsThe following options are available in the Scan window:

• Scan provides an alternative to the trigger buttons on the terminal.• View displays the bar code content in a separate screen.• Params is used to change scanning parameter options, such as:

• beep time (length of decode beep) • beeper frequency (tone)• LED-on time (length of time LED remains on upon decode)• Code ID (AIM, Symbol)• Wav File (sound of decode beep).

• Codes selects the code types the terminal is able to decode, and sets the options for each code type.

• Cancel closes the Scan window.

B-4

Demo Program

HTML Scan DemoThe HTML Scan demo provides the HTML application ScanBrowse. Also use this application to turn the Scan Wedge in ScanBrowse on and off.

To access the demo, tap HTML Scan on the main demo window.

Figure B-3. HTML Scan Demo Window

Wedge On/OffThese icons enable and disable the Scan Wedge. When enabled, the taskbar icon for the Scan Wedge appears in the task tray, and allows data to be scanned into edit fields.

Note: The Pocket PC Task Tray is only visible on the Today screen.

B-5


ScanBrowseScanBrowse uses Pocket Internet Explorer to render the HTML code and the Scan Wedge to scan data into scan enabled fields.

Figure B-4. Scan Browse Window

In this sample HTML application, the scan wedge is configured (via ScanWedge.reg) to bracket all scanned data with “{{“ and “}}” to allow the HTML application to differentiate scanned data from keyboard-entered data.

B-6

Demo Program

FilesTap Files on the main demo window for a file browser utility, File Explorer, that provides Windows Explorer-like functionality on Pocket PC terminals. File Explorer allows you to browse, cut, copy, paste, and delete files as well as execute the program. It also provides file transfer capability via the IrDA port.

Figure B-5. File Explorer Window

Also, access Microsoft File Explorer by selecting Start - Programs.

B-7


MagStripe ReaderSelect MagStripe on the demo’s main menu for a sample MagStripe application.

Figure B-6. MagStripe Window

B-8

Demo Program

Sounds (Audio Sample)Tap Sounds on the main demo window for an audio sample, which demonstrates how to record, play back, and save sounds.

Figure B-7. Audio Sample Window

Audio Files are opened from and saved to \Application\wav\ by default, and are configured by the following registry key:

HLCU\software\Symbol\settings“WavDirectory” = “\\Application\wav”

B-9


Images (ImageViewer Sample)Tap Images on the main demo window for an ImageViewer sample, which demonstrates how to manipulate displayed image files.

Figure B-8. ImageViewer Window

ImageViewer supports color .bmp files, and both color and mono .jpg files.

The application uses screen swiping and buttons to control images. Following is a description of each button:

Button Description Button Description

Pan Up (panning mode), increase vertical size of image.

Pan Down (panning mode), decrease vertical size of image.

Pan left (panning mode), decrease horizontal size of image.

Pan right (panning mode), increase horizontal size of image.

Restore the image to its original size. Locate the image in the upper left corner of screen.

Lock the aspect ratio of the image when resizing.

Set mode to “resize.”

B-10

Demo Program

CE AppsTap CE Apps on the main menu to access the following standard Windows CE applications:

• Note Taker• Calculator• Tasks• Calendar• Solitaire.

Figure B-9. CE Apps Window

Set mode to “fine panning.” Set mode to “rough panning.”

Open an image file. Exit the Image Viewer application.

Save the current image. About window.

Button Description Button Description

B-11


About Select the About button on the demo’s main window to view information about the demo program.

UtilitiesTap Utilities on the main demo window for diagnostic options that ensure various aspects of the terminal are functioning correctly.

Figure B-10. Utilities Window

• Configure accesses the Control Panel window. See the Control Panel section.• LED Test tests the green decode LED-on and LED cycle to ensure it is functioning

properly, and displays the state of the LED (on or off).• Key Test identifies each button on the terminal (except the Scan buttons) when

each button is pressed.• Display Test tests the pixels on the screen.• Memory Test demonstrates how to query available memory, calculate memory load

(%), and how to write code that properly handles system hibernate messages.• Main Menu returns to the demo’s main window.

B-12

Demo Program

Control PanelTap Configure on the Utilities window to access the Control Panel, used to specify the terminal settings.

Figure B-11. Control Panel Window

About and System VersionsTap About on the Control Panel to view the version of the Control Panel. Tap System Versions to view version information for the applications on the terminal.

Figure B-12. About and System Versions Windows

B-13


On the System Versions window:

• Platform indicates the operating system running on the PPT 2800 (Pocket PC).• OS Version specifies the version of the operating system.• OEM Name is the OEM name of the terminal.• OEM Version indicates the build version of the operating system.• IPL Version identifies the build version of the system loader.

Unique Unit IDTap Unique Unit ID on the Control Panel to view the terminal’s unique unit ID (a 16-byte hex number identifier), and the version numbers for RCM (Resource Coordinator Manager) API, Rescoord (Resource Coordinator) DLL, UUID DLL, and Temperature DLL.

Figure B-13. Unique Unit ID Window

Note: PPT 2800 Series Terminals do not support the Temperature DLL.

B-14

Demo Program

PersistPersist allows changes made by the Control Panel to remain in effect after a cold boot. When enabled, Persist creates .reg files which save specific settings that are made and restore the settings to the registry after a cold boot.

Toggle Persist to Yes to retain these changes after a cold boot.

Figure B-14. Persist

Note: Not all options support Permanent Persistence.

B-15


Touch CalibrateSelect Touch Calibrate to re-align the screen.

Figure B-15. Align Screen

Printer SettingsSelect Printer Settings on the Control Panel to select the printer and specify printer settings.

Figure B-16. Printer Settings Window

B-16

Demo Program

• To change the printer, tap Selected Printer to scroll through the available printers.• To set the communication parameter associated with the selected printer, tap the

Printer Parameter field, then select the communication parameter for the printer.• Version Info displays the Printer API version number.

Communication SettingsSelect Comm Settings on the Control Panel to specify the settings to use when communicating with other devices.

Figure B-17. Communication Settings Window

Tap Port to select the appropriate communication settings to be used by ActiveSync. Scroll through the communication settings to select the appropriate value.

B-17


Display SettingsSelect Display Settings on the Control Panel to customize the display contrast and backlight.

Figure B-18. Display Settings Window (Color Terminal Shown)

• Tap Display Contrast (monochrome terminals only) to increment the contrast value. The terminal’s display changes along with the value.

• Tap Intensity (color terminals only) to increment the intensity value. The terminal’s display changes along with the value.

• Tap Backlight to toggle the backlight on or off.• API Version displays the current version of the Display API.

B-18

Demo Program

Audio SettingsSelect Audio Settings on the Control Panel to specify the beeper volume and view the version numbers for the Audio and Notify APIs.

Figure B-19. Audio Settings Window

• Tap Beeper Volume to toggle the beeper volume between low, medium, and high. The beeper sounds to demonstrate each level selected.

• API Version displays the version number of the Audio API.• Notify API Version displays the version number of the Notify API.

B-19


Scanner SettingsSelect Scanner Settings on the Control Panel to specify scanner-related parameters.

Figure B-20. Scanner Settings Window

Tap Scanner Version to view the version numbers for the hardware, decoder, PPD, MDD, and API.

Refer to the Help file on the SDK for details on the available parameter options.

B-20

Appendix CGSM Demo Program

IntroductionGsmDemo demonstrates what features GSM and the PPT 2837 terminal offer, including making and receiving phone calls, sending and receiving SMS messages and setting up GPRS parameters.

GSM Demo Installation1. Download GSM Demo Application to the host computer from

http://devzone.symbol.com. 2. Establish an ActiveSync connection between the host computer and the terminal.

Depending on the accessory used for the connection, see the appropriate section in Chapter 4, Communications.

3. Copy the GSM Demo executable file, downloaded in step 1, to the Applications folder on the terminal. a. In ActiveSync on the host computer, click Explore. Windows Explorer opens the

Mobile Device window for the device.b. Open another Windows Explorer window and browse to the GSM Demo

executable file download in step 1.c. Right-click the file and click Copy. Place the cursor in the Applications folder on

the Mobile Device window (step 3a), right-click, and click Paste.

C-1



GSM Demo WindowsTo start GSM Demo:

1. Tap Start - Programs - File Explorer on the terminal.2. Navigate to the Applications folder, and select GSM Demo.

Main WindowWhen GSM Demo opens, it opens the internal serial port to the GSM modem and attempts to register with a network.The following window displays.

Figure C-1. GSM Demo Main Window

Note: If the PIN is enabled on the SIM, the Enter PIN window appears, and the demo does not register until you enter the PIN. See Enter Pin Address on page C-7 for details.

Network Status Displays the following messages as the modem attempts to connect: Opening GSM COM Port, Checking SIM Card, Configuring Modem, Searching, then Registered Home if the search is successful (Registered Roam if out of network).

Signal strength Displays signal strength.

C-2

GSM Demo Program

Dial # WindowThe Dial # feature controls the dial properties of the modem. Select Dial # on the main menu:

Figure C-2. Dial Window

Dial # Sets dial properties and places call (see Dial # Window on page C-3).

Send SMS Launches the Send SMS window so you can send a message to another terminal or modem (see Send SMS Window on page C-4).

Read SMS Displays a message from another terminal or modem (see Read SMS Window on page C-5).

Phone Number Phone number to dial.

Status Indicates if modem is connected to the specified number.

Speaker Volume Slide bar controls volume of speaker.

Mute Mic Turns microphone off.

Dial Dials the number specified.

Hangup Disconnects the session.

C-3


Send SMS WindowTo send an SMS message:

1. Tap Send SMS on the main window.

Figure C-3. Send SMS Window

2. Enter the phone number of the message recipient and the message. 3. Tap Send to send the message. A successful message window displays.

C-4

GSM Demo Program

Read SMS WindowTo read SMS messages:

1. Tap Read SMS on the main window. The following window displays, listing the messages available for viewing:

Figure C-4. SMS Inbox Window

2. Tap a message, then tap Read to open the message.

Figure C-5. Read SMS Window

3. Tap Delete to delete the message and return to the Read SMS window.

C-5


GSM Demo Menu CommandsThis section explains the menu commands specific to GSM Demo, accessed from the bottom of the screen.

File MenuTo exit the GSM Demo application, tap File - Exit.

Note that tapping X in the top corner of the main window causes the demo application to run in the background, and does not shut off the modem or close the application.

Options Menu

Settings WindowTap Options - Settings to view or change the status of the SIM card.

Figure C-6. Settings Window

Modify Address WindowTap Modify Address to change the service center phone number if the number is missing, its phone number has changed, or to choose an alternate service center.

C-6

GSM Demo Program

On the Service center address window, enter the new service center number in the New address field and tap Enter Address.

Figure C-7. Service Center Address Window

Enter Pin AddressTap Enter PIN on the Settings window to enter a new PIN number. Enter the PIN # in the Enter PIN number: field and tap Enter Pin.

Figure C-8. PIN # Window

C-7


Change Band WindowTap Change Band on the Settings window to make any changes. Tap Change to register the change.

Figure C-9. Change Band Window

Note: The modem resets (power cycles) when you change the band, indicated in the Network Status window.

C-8

GSM Demo Program

Change Power Mode WindowTap Change Power Mode to enable low power mode on the modem.

On the Change Mode Dialog window, select the desired power mode and tap Change. If you select Low Power Mode, enter the desired number of seconds in the Seconds before low power mode field.

Figure C-10. Change Mode Dialog Window

C-9


GPRS Parameters Window

PDP Context Tab

Figure 3-11. GPRS Parameters - PDP Context Tab


Table Version System generated. Contains internal version number representing the structure of the registry file.

Context ID Each set of parameters is collectively called a context. User is allowed to store three contexts. Select the number representing the particular set of context.

Context Each set of parameters is collectively called a context. Enter a name for the context.

PDP Type Information obtained from service provider. This represents the protocol type.

APN Information obtained from service provider. This represents the access point name.

PDP Address Information obtained from service provider.• If provider supports DHCP, this field is blank.• If provider does not support DHCP, obtain address from

provider.

Data Compression Information obtained from service provider.• If provider supports data compression, select No.• If provider supports data compression, select Yes.

C-10

GSM Demo Program

Min. Qos. Tab

Figure 3-12. GPRS Parameters - Min. Qos. Tab

Header Compression Information obtained from service provider.• If provider supports header compression, select No.• If provider supports header compression, select Yes.

Current Active Context Select the number representing the context to use for the connection.




Reliability Information obtained from service provider.A parameter indicating the transmission characteristics required by an application. The reliability class defines the probability of loss, duplication, missequencing or corruption of SDU (Service Data Unit).




C-11


Req. Qos. Tab

Figure 3-13. GPRS Parameters - Req. Qos. Tab




Reliability Information obtained from service provider.A parameter indicating the transmission characteristics required by an application. The reliability class defines the probability of loss, duplication, missequencing or corruption of SDU (Service Data Unit).



C-12

GSM Demo Program

Help MenuThe Help menu provides information about the GSM modem.

Figure C-14. GSM Demo Help Menu

About WindowSelect About on the Help menu for version information regarding the GSM Demo.

Figure C-15. GSM Demo About Window

C-13


Modem Info WindowSelect Modem Info on the Help menu for specific modem information.

Figure C-16. GSM Demo Modem Info Window

DLL InfoSelect DLL Info on the Help menu for specific DLL information.

Figure C-17. GSM Demo DLL Info Window

C-14

Appendix DTechnical Specifications

EnvironmentTable D-1 summarizes the PPT 2800’s intended operating environment.

Table D-1. PPT 2800 Operating Environment

Operating Temperature -20° C to +50° C (-4° F to +122° F)

Storage Temperature -25° C to +50° C (-13° F to +122° F)

Battery Charging Temperature 0° C to +40° C (+32° F to +104° F)

Note: To charge the battery for the mobile device, battery and charger temperature must be between +32° F and +104° F (0° C and +40° C).

Humidity 5% to 90% non-condensing

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) 8 kVdc air; 4 kVdc contact

Drop to Concrete 1.2 meters (4 feet)

Sealing IP54 (windblown rain and dust)

Decode Distance 3” - 10.5” (7.6 cm - 26.7 cm)

Size 1-D Scanning Terminal:7”L x 3.625”W x 1”H(177.8mm x 92mm x 25.4mm)2-D Scanning Terminal:7.625”L x 3.625”W x 1”D (grip area) x 1.5”D (scanner bay)(193.7mm x 92mm x 25.4mm x 38.1mm)

D-1


Weight (including battery) 1-D Scanning Terminal:10.3 oz. / 288 gm (batch); 11.8 oz. / 330 gm (wireless)2-D Scanning Terminal:13.8 oz. / 391 gm (batch); 15.3 oz. / 434 gm (wireless)

Table D-1. PPT 2800 Operating Environment

D-2

Technical Specifications

COM Port DefinitionsTable D-2. PPT 2800 COM Port Definitions

COM Port Definition

COM1 Serial/Cradle

COM2 Raw IrDA

COM3 IRComm

COM4 Scanning

COM5 Reserved

COM6 WAN

COM7 VCOM Ext Power

COM8 V2COM Ext Power

D-3


Pin-Outs

Figure D-1. ActiveSync Port (COM1)

Table D-3. PPT 2800 ActiveSync Port (COM1) Pin-Outs

Pin Description

1 ext ±5 volts

2 DSR

3 RXD

4 RTS

5 TXD

6 CTS

7 DCD

8 RI

9 DTR

10 RS232_gnd

11 Power_GND

12 9 Volts_In

13 NC

14 NC

Pin 1

D-4

Index

Numerics128-bit shared key . . . . . . . . . 4-20, 10-8, 10-940-bit shared key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20, 10-8

Aabout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6cradles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6SMDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3adding programs to Start menu . . . . . . 3-6installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3local operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12using cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8using cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9via modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

ad hoc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5, 10-7, 10-12adding programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

to Start menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5adjusting backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3adjusting memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40adjusting mobile computer settings . . . . . . . 3-6adjusting terminal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3AirBEAM

Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4package builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3staging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11synchronization with server . . . . . . . . . 5-9

AirBEAM configuration

Misc(1) tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Misc(2) tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Packages(2) tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Server tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

AirBEAM Smart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38aligning screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17, B-16applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

button assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

meeting requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5summary screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6summary screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

GSMDemo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1file menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6help menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14connecting to e-mail server . . . . 6-14creating messages . . . . . . . . . . 6-18managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16synchronizing e-mail . . . . . . . . . 6-14

notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

summary screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4attaching handstrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15audio sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

Index-1


audio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19AvantGo channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Bbacklight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31backup battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43batteries

charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 1-10charging spare batteries . . . . . . . . . . 1-12charging using cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12checking power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8optimizing battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44removing battery cover . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

battery and backup battery status . . . . . . 3-43block recognizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18boot

cold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28, 3-21, 3-31, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34, 3-40, 10-22

warm . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-21, 3-31, 3-34buttons

assigning applications . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17, 2-3

Ccable

pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

connecting power cable . . . . . . . . . . 1-13inserting in terminal . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, 4-8performing ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

calendar application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3creating appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4meeting requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5summary screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

calibrating screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16CE applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11changing profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20changing the date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36changing the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5chapter descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiiicharacter chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2character recognizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1charging batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

spare battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12using cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12using cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

cleaningcradle connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7terminal connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

cleaning terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3clear type fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49cold boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21, 3-31, 3-34,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40, 10-22, 13-22command bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-17communication setup

ActiveSync on host PC . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14ActiveSync on mobile computer . . . . . 4-12serial communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13USB communication setup . . . . . . . . . 4-13

communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1companion programs

Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Pocket Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Pocket Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9infrared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4to e-mail server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10to ISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

contacts application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6summary screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-13country code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

charging batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10charging spare batteries . . . . . . . . . . 1-12connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10connecting power supply . . . . . . . . . . 1-10connecting to host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10inserting terminal . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 4-11

Index-2

Index

performing ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9performing modem ActiveSync . . . . . 4-12

creating messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18creating splash screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20customizing the PPT 2800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Ddate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36DCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv, 1-6, 10-22, 12-3,

. . . . . .12-7, 13-3, 13-9, 13-22, 13-23default gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10demo program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9audio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19CE applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18file explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1HTML scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10ImageViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10magstripe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8MSR sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16Scan Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5ScanBrowse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5, B-6scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3scanner settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

Device Configuration Package . . . . . . . . . . . xv, 1-6, 10-22, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3, 12-7, 13-3, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9, 13-22, 13-23

device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29device name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21, 10-10disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-18DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10, 10-11

drawing on screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Ee-mail connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

creating messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20, 10-5, 10-8128-bit shared key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2040-bit shared key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20kerberos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20open system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

entering characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18entering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

drawing on screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22recording message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23writing on screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16, 13-18ESSID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19, 10-5, 10-17Ethernet communication

DHCP server config . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18host config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17installing eConnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Excelpocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Ffavorite links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3file explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25, 13-4, B-7finding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25flash file system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21

downloading partitions . . . . . . . . . . 13-24non-FFS partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23

IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23splash screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23

partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21copyfile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22regmerge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22

flash storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21function button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Index-3


Ggateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11GPRS

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19parameter configuration . . . . . . . . . . 11-3WAN connection configuration . . . . 11-16

GPRS parametersedit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6Min. Qos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8PDP context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7registry file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11Req. Qos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

GSMconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27WAN connection configuration . . . . 11-24

GSMDemo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1file menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6help menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-13install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

Hhandstrap

attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15hard reset . . . . . . 3-21, 3-31, 3-34, 3-40, 10-22

Iicons

status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7images

demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10ImageViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10inbox application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14, 6-18

connecting to e-mail server . . . . . . . . 6-14managing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16synchronizing e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

infrared connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7, 10-12

Initial Program Loader . . . . . . . . . 13-11, 13-23input method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13input panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

block recognizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18letter recognizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

installing development tools . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8internet connection

via GPRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19via GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 4-19

IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21, 10-11IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11, 13-23

error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

ISP connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Kkerberos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20, 10-8, 10-9

LLEAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10letter recognizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Lightweight Extensible

Authentication Protocol . . . . . . . 10-10loading applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11loading software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11locating WLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Mmagstripe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-8main battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Media Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16missed AP beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14mobile channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5mobile companion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19mobile computer

Index-4

Index

cold boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22mobile favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3, 8-7

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3MSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8my info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Nnavigation bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6network

configuring GPRS WAN . . . . . . . . . . 11-16configuring GSM WAN . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24

notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xivnotes application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Oopen system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20, 10-8operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1optimizing battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5owner information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18owner notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Ppartitions

downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24FFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21non-FFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23

IPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23splash screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23

parts of PPT 2800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4password hint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7, 3-21PDF417

raster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5, 10-17pin-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-4Pocket Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Pocket Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

browsing web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

favorite links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3mobile favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3, 8-7using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Pocket Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3pop-up menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14power button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17, 2-3power cable

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43Power Saving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12printer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

create new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

programsadding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4adding to Start menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5button assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11flash file system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14stop running programs . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Rradio signal transmission strength . . . . . . 10-5radio transmission power . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23, 3-15recording settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15regional settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

removing programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9repeat rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

cold boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28hard . . . . . . . 3-21, 3-31, 3-34, 3-40, 10-22soft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21, 3-31, 3-34warm boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Index-5


Ssafely maintaining terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3scanner

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23, 2-26

2D bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26raster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

scriptscreating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

SDK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvselecting a drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22selecting programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14selecting text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19selecting writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20setting date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19setting the device name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29setting time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19setting time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18setting Today . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7setting up a partnership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

about . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8, 3-28adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3, 3-6backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8, 3-34clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8, 3-9connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 3-40menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7owner information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 3-43regional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 3-45remove programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9sound and notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Symbol settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

signal strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4, 10-14SMDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

SMDK for eVC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3, 12-4system requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

SMDK for .NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv, 12-3, 12-6soft reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21, 3-31, 3-34software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-19

sounds demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-9specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1Spectrum24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1splash screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23

creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20Start menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

adding programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5selecting programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

starting the PPT 2800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21, 10-10Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5status icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4subnet mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Symbol Mobility Developer Kit

for eVC4 . . . . . . . . . . .1-6, 12-3, 12-4Symbol Mobility Developer Kit

for .NET . . . . . . . . . . . xv, 12-3, 12-6Symbol settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9synchronization cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, 4-8

Ttasks application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

summary screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11TCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

building hex image . . . . . . . . . 13-3, 13-10creating script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8defining properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18hex image download . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11saving script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1

Index-6

Index

Terminal Configuration Manager . . . . . . . 13-1time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Today screen . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 3-26, 8-8, 8-9troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10

Uunpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3using stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4using the PPT 2800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1, 6-1

scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

Vversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15volume

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Wwarm boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21, 3-31, 3-34web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7welcome window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20WINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10wireless

internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3, 4-19wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19WLAN Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Word

Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3word completion settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14writing on screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19writing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15WWAN

configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1configuring GPRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16configuring GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24

Index-7


Index-8

Tell Us What You Think...
We’d like to know what you think about this Manual. Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form to: (631) 738-3318, or mail to:
Symbol Technologies, Inc. One Symbol Plaza M/S B-4Holtsville, NY 11742-1300 Attention: Technical Publications Manager

IMPORTANT: If you need product support, please call the appropriate customer support number provided. Unfortunately, we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above.

User’s Manual Title:___________________________________________(please include revision level)

How familiar were you with this product before using this manual?

Did this manual meet your needs? If not, please explain.______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

What topics need to be added to the index, if applicable? ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

What topics do you feel need to be better discussed? Please be specific.______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

What can we do to further improve our manuals?______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Very familiar Slightly familiar Not at all familiar

2

72E-67136-02Revision A — February 2005

Symbol Technologies, Inc. One Symbol Plaza, Holtsville N.Y. 11742-1300http://www.symbol.com/manuals

PPT 2800 Series with Windows® Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide

http://www.symbol.com/manuals

Date post:	25-Apr-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	1 times
Download:	0 times